JP2019136181A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A gaming machine that displays a title for informing the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-101428

  In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects,
In the plurality of types of suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.

  According to such a structure, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
You may make it the ratio by which the case where the said 1st suggestion effect is performed is controlled to the said advantageous state is higher than the case where the said 2nd suggestion effect is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's action;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)),
An operational effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
As a suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (a second title reach title image 31AK062 displayed during the reach title production shown in FIG. 19D) (for example, an image) A display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120),
The display means includes
Plural types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc.) shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) A specific image (including a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame open. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed at the time of power activation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial appearance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch zone production | presentation determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a super reach kind determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch zone effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game suggestion effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of big hit effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit suggestion effect determination table, an accessory effect determination table, and a light-guide plate effect determination table. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit | end effect process (step S175). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect stage determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing production stage after completion | finish of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the case of changing production stage after completion | finish of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of prefetch zone production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of prefetch zone production. The production mode of the suggestion effect during reach will be described. The production mode of the suggestion effect during reach will be described. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. 10 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process in Modification 4. 16 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing in Modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a post-hit suggestion effect determination table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a magnetic detector, a setting board | substrate, and a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of a magnetic detector. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of a magnetic detector. It is explanatory drawing explaining the function of the input / output terminal of a magnetic detector. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control structure of a control part. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 136IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 136IW. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the detection of the magnetic change by a magnetic detector, and various signals. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 149IW. It is a block diagram which shows the example of a connection of each detection means and the main board | substrate in the characteristic part 149IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the bit allocation of the input port in the microcomputer for game control.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  It should be noted that in this specification, the comparison expression of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “difference”) means that one is a ratio of “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and reach types in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in this embodiment, the non-reach losing fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. , The variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the decorative pattern variable display mode is the reach mode and the display result is “lost”, and the display result is “big hit” Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, the reliability when each reach is executed (the jackpot reliability) is as follows: normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In FIG. 8A, a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed to a superreach level one level is shown, but a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of super reach production operation in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop and become a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, the entire screen of image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. The super reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP reach A” characters) is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs the sound corresponding to the reach title name (here “super reach A”). The title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 (here) Is displayed, and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach B. The Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9G, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory part until the notification is made, a super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the Super Reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but does not have to be completely coincident with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 9I, the contents of the effects common to those in FIG. 9C (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9J, the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. The

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the super reach E title 31AK010 (here, the letters “SP reach E”) is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9D, 9F, 9D). H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super reach when the reach is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. Things (title announcement using the entire screen) or the like may be used. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title announcements with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification, the expectation suggestion display is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expected level suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), etc., and the expected level may be suggested by a meter or a gauge. The numerical values may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily since any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a decision effect is displayed in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10D, the big hit combination is obtained. A definitive decorative symbol is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and executed in the lower right part of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in the figure, an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of super reach B is notified, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and sound, title notification by display and sound is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or displays a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may do it. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), a black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the degree-of-expected indication 31AK008. First, five white stars are displayed step by step. You may make it perform the expectation degree suggestion production which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 A performance that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 12F. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. However, there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation presentation when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, a title notification and an expectation suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effects are repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted. In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  In FIG. 12, although the example of the production | presentation operation | movement when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated is shown, other reach productions (title notification, expectation suggestion production) by production mode (state when reach production is performed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of performing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggestion step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of increasing the number of black stars stepwise is completed, the button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the super reach C title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. The title of reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title or the degree of expectation indication changes may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, so that the Super Reach A title is notified. Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not a notice effect is executed and an effect aspect. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The thing which changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the display color of the title at a different rate. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and are in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. Further, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be varied depending on the type of super reach. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, according to the effect mode of the action effect, the rate at which at least one effect mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different. The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in what color (how many steps) may be changed. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect at a different ratio according to production | presentation mode. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the character action or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or the degree of expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect), the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when the predetermined timing before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), for example, a character 31AK041 that is a friendly character and a character 31AK042 that is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17C to 17F and FIGS. 18G to 18I, a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. To change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the decorative symbol variable display is started as shown in FIG. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination related to the shutter effect (whether the shutter effect is present or the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation regarding feature 121IW)
Next, the characteristic part 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 121IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 includes a glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window between a door open position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened centering on the left side and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the store clerk can use the gaming machine frame 121IW003 and glass. The door frame 121IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 121IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 has a setting key 121IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate), which will be described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 121IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052, is housed in the board case 121IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 121IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 121IW201.

  Since the board case 121IW201 having the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. In addition, since the setting key 121IW051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. The setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature part 121IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys, but may be shared by a single key.

  The substrate case 121IW201 is provided with a display monitor 121IW029 and a display changeover switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029. The display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 121IW201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized in the board case 121IW201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in this feature 121IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operated from the inside of the gaming island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this feature 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end of the outer frame 121IW001a includes a setting key 121IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A security cover 121IW500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 from the back side is attached. This security cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The plate-shaped synthetic resin material has permeability. The vertical dimension of the short piece 121IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. The security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 121IW001a via the front end of the short piece 121IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab contacts (or closes) from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the right part of the board case 121IW201 in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Accordingly, the right side portion of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 cannot be operated by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 to move from the long piece 121IW500Ab. By being separated, the covering state by the long piece 121IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes operable.

  In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 121IW is regulated such that the operation to the operation part including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is regulated by the security cover 121IW500A in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 121IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

  Since the board case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 unless a store clerk or the like of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 121IW003 with the door key.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, A fraudulent member such as a wire or a cell board is entered from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may cause an illegal act of changing the setting value, so that the setting key 121IW051 is changed over to the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500A when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Restricted state in which operation on operation unit including switch 121IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Even in a restricted state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered by the security cover 121IW500A, Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 121IW201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily check the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the seal seal.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the feature part 121IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and for determining the normal figure display result The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown) in FIG. 20-5 (A) 20), a loss variation pattern determination table, a general diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a general diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), and the like shown in FIG.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature 121IW is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature 121IW, the winning probability for small hits is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for big hit and a determination value for small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the winning combination is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at probable change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “2” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/320 at non-probable change, 1/32 at non-probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. Winning is won.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Win a big hit with a higher probability (1/300 for non-probable change, 1/30 for probable change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “3”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the subject of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “3”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) than in the case of “2”. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are “1” and “2”. It is supposed to be. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of variable display, the winning probability is won with the same probability (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display To do. On the other hand, since half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is won with the same probability (1/2) as when “1” and “2”.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. Note that “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C) indicate the probability (proportion) of being a big hit and the probability (proportion) of being a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. However, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, a case where the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of the set value, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the jackpot winning probability, the winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference in the winning probability for the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference in the winning probability for the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability per hit at the set value “1” is 1/100, the winning probability per hit at the set value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, You may set so that the winning probability per small hit at setting value “3” may be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration indicated by the feature 121IW may be applied.

  In this feature 121IW, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20 (C) to determine whether to win or not. The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit determination is performed depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the second.

  Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the case where the advantage becomes higher in the order of the setting value “1” <the setting value “2” <the setting value “3” is shown. For example, the priority ranking according to the gaming state May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be controlled to a high probability / high base state, to maintain a high probability / high base state until the next big hit, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a period in which a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a winning ball can be easily obtained. Therefore, unlike the other gaming states, in the specific gaming state (in this example, high probability / high base state), conversely, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value “1” may be set to the highest advantage.

  In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end count) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of times of completion, the probability variation continuation rate (recession rate) may increase in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  In this feature part 121IW, three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature 121IW, a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol variation display is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although it is comprised so that it may be used, a different table may be provided and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined may be different.

  In the jackpot type determination table, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type is assigned for each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. Note that a determination value corresponding to a random number is actually assigned to a loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In order to simplify the above, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high and the set value is “2”. When the ratio determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined for the jackpot type A is high.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 121IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the feature section 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. It has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit gaming state is started. This is a period in which a fanfare effect is performed as an effect operation to be notified.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the production control board 12 side, This is a period in which an interval effect as an effect operation for informing the start of the round is executed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot end process in step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be shorter.

  As described above, in the feature unit 121IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of being determined as the big hit type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as the big hit type A is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature 121IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. At the same time, the set value is “1”. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is increased in the order of “<2” <“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of winning the jackpot (race rate) is high, the average duration of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  This feature 121IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggest a set value during the big hit game, but this big hit suggestion effect is used for the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the big hit suggestion effect, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  Also, in this feature 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each set value is different, so that the jackpot When the winning probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods with different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which determination values are set so that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period in which relatively long periods are set is increased in the order of jackpot type A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature part 121IW, in any case of jackpot type A to jackpot type C, the time-shortening control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a special number of times (100 times in this feature part 121IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time-shortening control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time reduction control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot is generated again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. You may be made to do. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. This feature 121IW is configured such that the ratio of winning big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or in place of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. You may make it a rate (renso ratio) differ.

  Also, in this feature part 121IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds in the big hit game, presence / absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.) in the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the fanfare period, the interval Although the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the presence or absence of short-time control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, and the advantage differ You may do it. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  The feature unit 121IW exemplifies a mode in which, depending on the set value, the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, there is one jackpot type that cannot be determined among jackpot type A, jackpot type B, jackpot type C, or There may be multiple. In other words, depending on the set value, the determination rate of the jackpot type is different, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100% Included in determining by percentage.

  In addition, in this feature 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type. However, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to such a mode. You may comprise so that a period may differ. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period corresponding to the set value may be determined uniformly according to any of the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on whether the set value is “1” to “3”, the lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the feature unit 121IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value that has been set, so that the game entertainment can be improved. .

  In this feature 121IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in this feature part 121IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous for the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability are increased, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Moreover, in this feature part 121IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, the gameability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. The game state after the big hit game is controlled to be a probable state based on passing through the predetermined count switch, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs according to the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. As a gameability (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (during time-short control). Good. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as 1 to 3 and the game is the same, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than those in the case where these set values are any one of 1 to 3. Thus, a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). The game state may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a probable change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in this feature 121IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in this feature 121IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “3”.

  In addition, in this feature part 121IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the opening period and the number of opening of the big winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantage degree in the game is the same. .

(Fluctuation pattern judgment table)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature 121IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting change is performed at power-on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( Hereinafter, it is configured to use different loss variation pattern determination tables.

  Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, the fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 121IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be used in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using a real-time clock or the like. In addition, a period until the first big hit is generated may be a special period.

  Each of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is a normal reach loss or a super reach loss in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested depending on the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

  Also, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency at which normal reach is executed than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value). And can enhance the entertainment interests of the game.

  For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern) is determined at the same rate regardless of the setting value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it do. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested depending on the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be varied according to the set value.

  Also, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, except for non-reach loss, depending on the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the normal reach loss: super reach loss balance) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss is remarkably increased in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), the normal reach loss is performed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The ratio is slightly higher (in this example, it is higher by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency of normal reach loss and super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In this feature 121IW, setting suggestion effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values. This is because the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the entire super reach lose differ according to the set values, and according to the set values. This is a concept including that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only the normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

  The feature 121IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature part 121IW. For example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is different from the normal pattern and the set value is 1 or 2). May be selected only in the special period, and the special variation pattern may be selected only in the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature 121IW, a plurality of types of non-reach losing variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach losing, it is further determined as one of non-reach losing A to C. It is configured. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the reach variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 includes non-reach loses A to C, and any of non-reach loses A to C, normal reach loses, and super reach loses. You may comprise so that it may determine.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach loss C (fluctuation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2”. ", The ratio determined to non-reach loss B (fluctuation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (fluctuation time 9 seconds) is high. A judgment value is assigned to.

  In the feature unit 121IW, when the setting value is “1”, since the ratio that is determined to be non-reach loss C is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss is likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, since the ratio determined as non-reach loss A is high, the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature 121IW is configured such that the winning value (the payout rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. At the same time, the set value is “1”. ”<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”in order, the average variation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the big hit (race rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling ability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  The feature 121IW is configured to have different average fluctuation times by changing the ratio of non-reach loses A to C with different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the variation times are different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when multiple types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, it is possible to vary the display time of the decorative symbols, such as shaking display of high-speed variation display, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

  In addition, in the feature unit 121IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a fixed decorative design (final decoration pattern (final) is used. The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In addition, this feature 121IW is configured so that the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C is determined for each set value, thereby winning the big hit When the probability (race rate) is a high setting, the average variation time is increased, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the variation time of each variation pattern for each set value May be set to be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (the winning rate) of the jackpot is higher.

  In this feature 121IW, a shortening variation pattern having a variation time shorter than that of other variation patterns is provided. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach losing (variation time 1.5 seconds) shorter than non-reach losing A (variation time 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, the state is canceled and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. For this reason, in this feature 121IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more may be varied according to the set value.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 121IW will be described. FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characteristic part 121IW. In this feature 121IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is made, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 121IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the production control means activation wait timer (step 121IWS004), and checks whether the value of the production control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004, and the processes of steps 121IWS004 to S005 are repeated. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 121IWS006 is executed after waiting for the effect control CPU 120 to start up, and the setting value change and confirmation, RAM initialization and recovery processing, etc. are executed. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the production control CPU 120 is activated. Occurrence can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 103, for example, clears a factory default setting flag indicating that the factory default setting is stored in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). In step 121IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that the setting value remains unchanged from the factory is set, and the value of the setting value is set in step 121IWS006. It may be confirmed whether or not the value at the time of shipment from the factory remains the same. If the factory default setting is maintained (step 121IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 121IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 performs backup to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as step S4. It is determined whether data is stored (step 121IWS007). Specifically, in step 121IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. (Step 121IWS008). In step 121IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or checksum whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping power supply. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if power interruption or the like occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  In step 121IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 121IW029.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing (step 121IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance display such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base is displayed. This information is not cleared but retained. In the RAM clear 1 process, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is OFF (N in Step 121IWS011), when the setting key 121IW051 is OFF (N in Step 121IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In step 121IWS013 N), the process does not proceed to step 121IWS014, but shifts to a loop process.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS006 to S014 is executed, in this feature unit 121IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 121IWS007 and S008), or when the setting at the time of factory shipment is left (step 121IWS006 Y), if a power interruption occurs during the setting change (step 121IWS009 Y), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 opened. On the condition that the RAM is cleared, the set value can be changed after step 121IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, the setting value cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS017). If setting key 121IW051 is on, CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that setting confirmation processing is to be started to effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

  Upon receiving the setting confirmation processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control for notifying that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the presentation control board 12 may be configured such that when a presentation operation button such as the push button 31B is pressed, “maintenance mode” or the like is displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. “Maintenance mode” refers to, for example, the date / time setting of the real-time clock, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what type of error occurred), the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change This is a mode in which the recording of setting values can be confirmed. When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are finished, the maintenance mode is also finished.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

  When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped, by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in Step 121IWS016) or the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in Step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 121IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production | presentation control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production | presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 121IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 2 process (step 121IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, the role ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared but are retained.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 121IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating the start of the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). Upon receiving the setting change processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (step 121IWS029).

  When the setting change process ends, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS030). In addition, CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to effect control board 12 (step 121IWS031). In addition, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in Step 121IWS025) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in Step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

  In this feature 121IW, the processes of steps IWS034 to S036 are the same as the processes of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (step 121IWS019).

  In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies a setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSA02). If setting key 121IW051 is on, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02, and the processes of steps 121IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting check error process (step 121IWSA04). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing. In step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that it is a setting confirmation error, and executes the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. In this example, when the setting check error process is executed, the process shifts to a loop process, so that the error state is continued until the power is turned on again and the process is not allowed to proceed.

  If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process of step 121IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

  Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 121IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to “2”, and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029. May update the display on the display monitor 121IW029 to “3”, and if “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated to “1”. Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value) (step 121IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02, and the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in an open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processing of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting change error process (step 121IWSB07). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing. In step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating a setting change error, and executes a setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to a loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the process does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 121IWS027, after the power is turned on again, the RAM clear 1 process is executed (see Y in step 121IWS009, 121IWS014). The error state will be released.

  If setting key 121IW051 is not on, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process of step 121IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

  FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram of processing executed when the power is turned on. In this feature 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on), the clear switch is on. If so, a setting change process (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch is OFF, a setting confirmation process (steps 121IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 121IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the restoration process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Executed.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends. Note that when the big prize opening is open, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, at the timing when the power is turned off, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big prize opening.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when a store clerk or the like of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

  When the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 121IW052 by a game shop clerk or the like. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →... Each time the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is operated). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 121IW029 to blink on the basis of the fact that the setting key 121IW051 is turned OFF by the operation of the store clerk or the like of the game hall. To the store clerk and the like that the new set value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12 (A) (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the jackpot is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a change display result, a jackpot type, a change pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be executed.

  In the setting change process in the feature unit 121IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of this feature 121IW), or the most advantageous for the player The set value (“3” in the case of this feature 121IW) may be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-12, the setting value is displayed using the first display among the four-digit displays of the display monitor 121IW029 when the setting value is confirmed or changed. For example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 121IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is “1”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays “−S−1” in four digits, and if the set value is “2”, “−S-2” is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029. The display monitor 121IW029 may display “−S-3” as a 4-digit display if the set value is “3”. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the setting value is “1”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays four digits “1111”, and if the setting value is “2”, the display monitor 121IW029 displays four digits “2222”. May be.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the feature unit 121IW will be described. FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 121IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step 121IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step 121IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 121IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 121IWS102 to S104, in this feature 121IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. However, the display of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning port and the second starting winning port. May be configured to execute.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 121IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS108). As already described, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 121IWS031, but even after the power is turned on, When the variable display is started by executing the process of 121IWS 108, a set value command is transmitted.

  Even if the same variation pattern is used, if a variation pattern command different for each set value is transmitted, the variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. As a result, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the configuration may be such that the set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are equivalent to the number of setting values. May be provided.

  Further, in this example, the case where the same set value command is transmitted for the set value command transmitted at power-on (see step 121IWS031) and the set value command transmitted at the start of fluctuation (see step 121IWS108) is shown. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the set value command for turning on the power and the set value command for starting the change may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be sent when the power is turned on and when the change is started. Good.

  Also, in this example, a case is shown in which a set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation, but it is configured to transmit an effect control command that uses both the variation pattern command and the set value command. Also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the setting value is “1”, and when the variation value command is “2”. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and when the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which set value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. You may comprise so that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio may differ. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. The ratio may be selected, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence or number of pseudo-continuations, presence / absence and type of reach are different. Also, in this case, for example, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is selected uniformly, or when the set value command cannot be received normally, the dedicated selection ratio The change pattern may be selected with the.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the current gaming state (step 121IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state background designation command when in the probability variation state, and performs control to transmit the time variation background designation command in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control to send a normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random value MR1, and determines that the big hit or small hit is determined if they match. A program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in Step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (Step 121IWS111). If it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 121IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step 121IWS112), and proceeds to step 121IWS116.

  If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in Step 121IWS111), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to Step 121IWS116.

  When the value of the random value MR1 matches any one of the big hit determination values (Y in step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to select a type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A ”,“ Big hit type B ”or“ big hit type C ”) is determined as the big hit type (step 121 IWS 114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is “big hit type A”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “big hit type B”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type When the big hit type is “big hit type C”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, “7” as the big hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to jackpot classification. For example, when the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS117).

(Direction mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in this feature 121IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in the feature part 121IW. In this feature part 121IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control random number update process in step S77, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect mode change process for changing the effect mode (step 121IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

  In this feature part 121IW, it is possible to control to three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C. For example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters appearing in the notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process in step 121IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the production control board 12, the production mode may be changed based on a predetermined date or time based on the date / time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the decision to change the presentation mode.

  In step 121IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the changed effect mode may be set, and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode A, the production mode A flag may be set, and the production mode B flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode B, the production mode B flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode C flag before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the production mode C, the production mode C flag may be set and the production mode A flag or the production mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order, such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A →. You may make it change randomly from mode AC.

(Command analysis processing)

  20-16 to 20-18 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 121IWS303). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 121IWS304), effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 121). 121IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a setting value command reception flag indicating that the setting value command has been normally received at least once after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (step 121IWS306).

  In this feature 121IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. The Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where no set value is stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting check process or the recovery process is executed. A configuration value command may be transmitted whenever the power is turned on.

  In this feature 121IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting changing process is performed. However, the setting value command is normal due to a command missing or garbled data. If it cannot be received at the same time, the process of step 121 IWS 305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature 121IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the processing of step 121IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It is executed, and the set value can be stored in the set value storage area.

  Even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 reads the set value command, You may comprise so that it may be determined whether the setting value contained is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from “1” to “3”, but “5” or “10” is not set and includes a value that does not have a flaw. In such a case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, the newly received set value command is used. It may be configured to determine that an inconsistency has occurred and to determine that there is an abnormality when the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, it is determined that the setting value command has not been received normally, and the rendering is limited according to the processing method indicated by the feature unit 121IW. You may comprise.

(Initial outcome setting)
In the feature part 121IW, when the presentation control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, the setting change process end command, and the setting confirmation process end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process. In the image display device 5, control for displaying a predetermined initial appearance (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols that is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variation display is started). Perform (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance production).

  If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 121IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial appearance determination table is used to determine whether the combination of an even number of initial designs (for example, “246” or “224”), which is a combination of even numbers of decorative symbols, and an odd number of decorative designs. A certain odd initial appearance (for example, “135”, “113”, etc.) and a special initial appearance that is a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) are determined (step 121 IWS 309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  20-19 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial outcome determination table. In step 121IWS309, the lottery process based on the random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the ratio determined to the odd initial appearance is higher in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the game starts, if the odd initial outcome is displayed, the setting is changed, and the set value is advantageous compared to the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the special initial appearance may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game starts, it is determined that the setting change has been made and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, which can enhance the interest.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 121IWS310). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the initial output determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) to determine the initial output (step 121IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS310 to S311 is executed, in this feature 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting The initial outcome is determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined to be the odd initial outcome is the lowest, and it is not determined to be the special initial outcome. Such a configuration reduces the situation where an odd initial appearance or special initial outcome is displayed and a player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set, and the game is less interesting. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS312). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial outcome using the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

  20-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial appearance determination table for the effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), in the initial outcome determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to be an odd initial outcome as compared to the setting value “3” that is most advantageous to the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case that it is determined as a special initial appearance.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS312 to S313, in this feature 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of this, the odd initial appearance and special initial outcome are displayed to reduce the situation where the player is discouraged and discouraged, and the fall of interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial appearance determined in steps 121IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 121IWS314).

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance as an even initial appearance, and the image display device 5. , The control for displaying the even initial number is performed (step 121IWS315).

  When the processing of step 121IWS315 is executed, the feature unit 121IW uniformly displays the even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode B. This can reduce the situation of disappointing the player by dismissing the odd initial appearance or special initial appearance even though an unfavorable set value is set, and prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. I have to.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the rendering mode B, the odd initial appearance symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the odd-numbered initial appearance symbol determination ratio is set to be lower than the setting value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye symbol may be determined.

  In this example, the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is shown is a case where the even initial appearance is uniformly displayed. However, such a mode is not limited. . For example, when the set value command has not been received normally and in the production mode B, the set value command such as a combination of symbols “???” cannot be normally received as the initial appearance. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial outcome. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest any setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial appearance.

  Further, the processing when the set value command cannot be received normally (or when the set value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when N is determined in step 121IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored as a default in the setting value storage area to determine the initial outcome. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command has not been received normally can be stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. Also good.

  If the received effect control command is one of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, and the setting confirmation process end command (step 121IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 The initial appearance is determined to be the even initial appearance, and the image display device 5 performs control to display the even initial appearance (step 121IWS317). In the feature unit 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be the even initial appearance and is not determined to be the odd initial appearance. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial appearance. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

  If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 121IWS 318), the effect control CPU 120 executes a RAM error notification (step 121IWS 319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “RAM error abnormality has occurred” on the image display device 5, and outputs a sound indicating a RAM error abnormality or an error sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R. Or the game effect lamp 9 or LED is controlled to emit light with a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound of the maximum volume or the error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits light with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full color LED). It is desirable to emit white light).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 121IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command formed in the RAM. Store in the area (step 121IWS321). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit or whether to make a big hit, a big hit type or a small hit type) (step 121IWS323), for the production control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS324).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (an effect control command for designating the display of a decorative symbol stop symbol) (step 121IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag ( Step 121 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 121IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 121IWS328).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 121IWS330).

  The received effect control command designates whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit pre-determined by the symbol designation command (start winning determination process (see step S101)), and whether the big hit type or the small hit type is determined (Step 121IWS331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received symbol designation command in the first available storage area in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS331). Step 121 IWS 332).

  If the received effect control command is a variation category command (an effect control command for designating a determination result of a variation category (variation pattern type or variation pattern) determined in advance by the start winning determination process (see step S101)) (step 121IWS333). ), The effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM (step). 121IWS 334).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step 121IWS335), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received first reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. The storage area is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored (step 121IWS 336). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS337). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS338).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step 121IWS339), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received second reserved memory number addition designation command as the start winning command formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step 121IWS 340). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increments the hold display by one in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the second hold storage number display (step 121IWS341). Further, the production control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS342).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS343), the effect control CPU 120 erases one reserved display in the first reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The hold display is shifted one by one, and the first hold storage number display is updated (step 121IWS344). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS345).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS 346), the effect control CPU 120 erases one reserved display in the second reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The hold display is shifted one by one, and the second hold storage number display is updated (step 121IWS347). Further, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step 121IWS348).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 121IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS301.

  The feature 121IW is configured not to display the odd initial outcome when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, the odd initial outcome may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined for the odd-numbered initial appearance may differ depending on the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial appearance or even initial output, an initial output that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied and set) It may be determined that the value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined), an initial appearance that the specific setting value is determined, and the like may be displayed according to the setting value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, the possibility of being the setting value 1 is denied when the specific initial appearance is displayed by preventing the setting of the specific initial appearance, and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. Also, for example, only when the setting value is 3, by determining the specific initial appearance, when the specific initial appearance is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. . In addition, when determining the initial appearance, it may be determined as one of these initial outcomes by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
The feature unit 121IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, , A design suggestion effect during a game that is executed during a decorative pattern change display), a setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and a jackpot suggestive effect that is executed during a big hit (for example, during a big hit game) Has been. In this feature part 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes having different suggestion reliability. You may make it the reliability of suggestion differ for every. For example, the suggestion level before the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> the suggestion effect during the game or the suggestion effect before the game> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the jackpot> Suggestion during game> Direction suggestion during jackpot> Pre-game suggestion effect, or suggestion during jackpot suggestion> Indication suggestion during game> Indication before game suggestion The reliability of the suggestion may be increased. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute a part of the setting suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect that suggests that the setting change has been performed) or all, or the execution ratio The setting may be changed so as to be lowered (or raised). For example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and setting related to the setting suggestion effect by operating an operation means such as a push button 31B or an operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only an administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Pre-reading notice setting process)
In addition, in this feature 121IW, in addition to the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect, the pre-read zone effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the effect stage as an effect that can suggest the set value It is possible to produce effects by changing the above.

  FIG. 20-20 is a flowchart showing the prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a command for starting a winning prize is newly received (step 121IWS401). Specifically, a set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) are stored in the command storage area at the time of winning a prize. This can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a command for starting winning a set is not newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

  If a command for starting winning a set is newly received, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a new starting prize for the first starting prize opening has occurred (step 121IWS402). . Note that whether or not the start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred, specifically, whether or not the newly received pending storage number addition designation command is the first pending storage number addition designation command. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not. If the start winning to the first start winning opening has not occurred (that is, if the starting winning to the second start winning opening has occurred), the process is ended as it is.

  If a start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is 2 or more (step 121IWS403). If the first reserved memory number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first reserved memory number is 1), the processing is terminated as it is.

  In this example, the processes of steps IWS402 and S403 are executed, so that the prefetch zone effect may be executed only when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed twice or more. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-read zone effect can be executed, or the pre-read zone effect is executed even when only one change display is executed after the start winning prize. It may be possible to configure.

  If the first reserved storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a pre-read zone effect execution flag indicating that the pre-read zone effect is being executed is set (step 121IWS404). If the pre-read zone effect execution flag is set (that is, if the pre-read zone effect is already being executed), the processing is ended as it is. By executing the process of step 121IWS404, in this example, when the prefetch zone effect is already being executed, the prefetch zone effect is not determined redundantly.

  If the pre-read zone effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the pre-read zone effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 first of the symbol designation commands stored in the start winning command storage area. All symbol designating commands (all symbol designating commands stored in association with the first reserved storage number addition designating command) based on winning at the start winning award are extracted (step 121IWS405).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not any of the extracted symbol designation commands indicates that the prefetch determination result is a big hit (step 121IWS406). If there is a jackpot (that is, if there is a jackpot in the first reserved memory), the effect control CPU 120 uses the look-ahead zone for jackpot as a table for determining the presence or absence of the look-ahead zone effect. An effect determination table is selected (step 121IWS407). If there is no big hit (that is, if there is no big hit in the first reserved memory), the effect control CPU 120 uses the prefetch zone for losing as a table for determining the presence or absence of the prefetch zone effect. An effect determination table is selected (step 121IWS408). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected prefetch zone effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prefetch zone effect (step 121IWS409).

  20-21 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch zone production | presentation determination table. Among these, FIG. 20-21 (A) has shown the specific example of the prefetch zone production | presentation determination table for jackpots. FIG. 20-21 (B) shows a specific example of a prefetch zone effect determination table for loss. As shown in FIG. 20-21, in this example, when there is a big hit in the first reserved memory, it is decided to execute the prefetch zone effect with a probability of 70%, If there is no big hit among them, it is decided to execute the prefetch zone effect with a probability of 1%.

  In this example, the case where the execution ratio of the pre-read zone effect is changed depending on whether or not it is a big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the execution ratio of the prefetch zone effect may be varied according to the presence / absence and type of super reach. Further, for example, the execution ratio of the prefetch zone effect may be varied in accordance with the presence / absence of pseudo-continuations and the number of pseudo-continuations.

  When it is determined to execute the prefetch zone effect (Y in step 121IWS410), the effect control CPU 120 sets a prefetch zone effect execution flag (step 121IWS411). Further, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter for counting the number of executions of the prefetch zone effect to 0 (step 121IWS412). The pre-read zone effect execution flag set in step 121IWS411 is reset when a big hit occurs, and the pre-read zone effect is ended. Further, in this example, when a big hit does not occur even when the variable display is executed four times (when the value of the pre-read zone effect number counter becomes 4), when the variable display is ended. It is assumed that the pre-read zone effect execution flag is reset to end the pre-read zone effect.

  By executing the above processing, in this feature 121IW, execution of the pre-read zone effect may be determined when a new start prize is generated. When execution of the pre-read zone effect is determined, the pre-read zone effect is started when the first variable display is started, and when a big hit occurs in the second to fourth variable displays, the set value “ 1 ”to“ 3 ”.

  In this example, the case where presence / absence of the pre-reading zone effect is determined based on the pre-reading determination result indicated by the symbol designating command is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the presence / absence of a pre-read zone effect may be determined based on a pre-read determination result (for example, whether or not super reach is achieved) indicated by the variable category command.

  Further, in this example, when execution of the prefetch zone effect is determined, the prefetch zone effect is started when the first variable display is uniformly started. I can't. For example, a plurality of timings may be provided as the start timing of the prefetch zone effect. In this case, for example, when the execution of the prefetch zone effect is determined in the prefetch notice setting process, it is further determined whether the start timing of the prefetch zone effect is the first variation, the second variation, or the third variation. The pre-read zone effect may be started from the determined start timing.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS501).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the production control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration production (step 121IWS502, step 121IWS503). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 121IWS504), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” (step 121IWS505), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the production control CPU 120 does not execute the customer waiting demonstration production (N in step 121IWS 506), and whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches a predetermined condition. (Step 121IWS507). In step 121IWS507, for example, when a timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the change display has not been executed once and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. That is, when a predetermined period elapses without executing variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

  If the timekeeping result by the timekeeping means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 121IWS508). That is, in step 121IWS508, it is confirmed whether the game has not yet started.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined according to the set value (step 121IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

  In the feature 121IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp has a first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the controlled waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect aspect is controlled When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  20-23 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 121IWS510, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, The presence / absence and execution mode of the pre-game suggestion effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 20-23 (A), determination values are assigned in order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3” so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed. It has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed, and that it is set to an advantageous set value by being executed in the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), the third effect may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting change has been performed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 121IWS511). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. Then, the production mode is determined (step 121IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS511 to S512 is executed, the feature unit 121IW has a setting value that is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and it is not determined as the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS513). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 121IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

  FIG. 20-23 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself determined is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode and the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS513 to S514, in this feature unit 121IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode, thereby reducing the situation where the player is disappointed and discouraged, thereby preventing the lowering of interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 121IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 121IWS515). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 121IWS516 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is limited so as not to be executed.

  By executing the processing of step 121IWS513, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, The situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed despite the unfavorable set value being set and the player is discouraged is reduced, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the set value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the presence or absence and kind of suggestion production may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 20-23 (A), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects seems to perform the ratio performed according to a setting value. It may be.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature 121IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect at different ratios according to the setting value. This is because the pre-game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode). 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  The feature 121IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggesting effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, even when the setting is not changed, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable. In this case, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

  For example, FIG. 20-23 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of recovery is received. When the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A) is compared with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), when a command at the time of recovery is received, that is, the setting change is made. When not being performed, the proportion of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect is low and the difference in execution proportion between the set values is also smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing in this way, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

  If the number of fluctuations after power-on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect in a form including execution history information of setting suggestion effects (excluding pre-game suggestion effects) (step 121IWS516). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  When the processing of step 121IWS 516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of setting suggestion effects (indication suggestion during game or suggestion effect during jackpot), execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution), etc. A demonstration of waiting for a customer in a manner in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 121IWS 516 is executed, a customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, In the image display device 5, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed. In addition, on the side of the production control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (the production mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial appearance effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, big hit suggestion effect, etc.) Information may be stored, and an effect may be executed in which a setting value is estimated from the information and notified. In addition, this production | presentation alert | reports the setting expectation degree (or setting value estimated) calculated based on the predetermined reference | standard from the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect | action, and does not alert | report an actual setting value. .

  In this feature part 121IW, the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 121IWS508 to 121IWS515. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the processing of step 121IWS516, but information related to the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, interest can be given to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, a motivation for playing the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game shop can be given, and the interest can be enhanced. . Note that the pre-game suggesting effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am) using, for example, a real-time clock or the like, without being limited to the example of the feature unit 121IW. Also good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information related to the suggestion effect during game during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the feature section 121IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. You may comprise. Further, when a player uses a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by a player accessing the Web server using a mobile terminal (or analyzing a two-dimensional code) and displayed on a display device included in the mobile terminal. Moreover, the setting suggestion image which suggests a setting value may be displayed on the display apparatus with which a portable terminal is equipped, when a player reads the two-dimensional code containing execution history information using a portable terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined criterion is calculated from execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (which is only an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

(Variable display start setting process)
20-24 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 121IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step 121IWS602). That is, the display control result of the variable display of the identification information (decoration of the decorative pattern) is performed according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means by the processing of the step 121IWS602 being executed by the effect control CPU 120. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined decorative symbol stop pattern in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decoration symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  In step 121IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stopped symbols. Also, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as the stop symbols. To do.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of small hit symbols according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. . In this example, the combination of “135” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is A, and the combination of “357” is determined as the small hit symbol when the small hit type is B. In the case of the type C, a combination of “579” is determined as the small hit symbol.

  If the received display result designation command indicates a loss, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

  If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 121IWS602, displays a chance symbol pattern (for example, “223” or “445” as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream). The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, a stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display to start this time includes super reach (step 121IWS 603). Whether or not the display is a change display including super reach can be specifically determined by confirming the change pattern designated by the change pattern command read out in step 121IWS601. In the case of variable display including super reach, the production control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the super reach type determination table for determining the type of super reach, and develops during the variable display of decorative symbols. The type of super reach to be performed is determined (step 121IWS 604).

  FIG. 20-25 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the super reach type determination table. Among these, FIG. 20-25 (A) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “1”. FIG. 20-25 (B) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “2”. FIG. 20-25 (C) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “3”.

  In this example, when the super reach is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbols, it can be developed into four types of super reach A to D. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (A), when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach B is the highest. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (B), when the set value is “2”, the ratio of determining to execute super reach C is the highest. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (C), when the set value is “3”, the ratio of determining to execute the super reach D is the highest.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines an icon pattern to be displayed during the super reach according to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 (step 121IWS605). In step 121IWS605, the effect control CPU 120 selects an icon pattern determination table for determining an icon pattern according to the set value, performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected icon pattern determination table, and the icon pattern. To decide.

  20-26 and 20-27 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the icon pattern determination table. Among these, FIG. 20-26 (A) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “1”. FIG. 20-26B shows a specific example of an icon pattern determination table selected when the setting value is “2”. FIG. 20-27 (C) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “3”.

  In this example, when the start timing of the super reach is reached during the decorative pattern variation display, the panel images A to D corresponding to each of the super reach A to D overlap the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A at the top. Is displayed. Then, in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the panel image corresponding to the super reach A is deleted in order, and the effect is developed into a type of super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the beginning. Is executed.

  In this example, when it is determined that super reach A is to be executed, the panel image corresponding to super reach A is displayed at the top without erasing the panel image even if the push button 31B is operated. The state remains unchanged. If it is decided to execute super reach B, the panel image corresponding to super reach B is displayed at the top, and the panel image is deleted even if the push button 31B is operated further. The panel image corresponding to Super Reach B does not change while being displayed at the top. If it is determined that the super reach C is to be executed, if the panel image corresponding to the super reach C is displayed at the top, the panel image is deleted even if the push button 31B is further operated. The panel image corresponding to the super reach C is not changed as it is displayed at the top.

  In this example, icon images may be displayed on the panel images B to D corresponding to the super reach B to D, respectively, depending on the icon image displayed on the panel image that is finally displayed at the top. The suggestion effect during reach is executed by suggesting the current set value.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 20-27, in this example, there are nine types of icon patterns 1-9. The icon pattern 1 is a pattern in which no icon image is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. Therefore, when the icon pattern 1 is determined, it is determined that the suggestion effect during reach is not executed. The icon pattern 2 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. The icon pattern 3 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel images B to C and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 4 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images C to D. The icon pattern 5 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B, the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C, and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 6 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. The icon pattern 7 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images B to C and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. The icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel images C to D. The icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “★” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A), when the set value is “1”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 2 to 5 in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B is compared. (In the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a loss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is “1”, the execution ratio of super reach B is high, so that the icon image “●” is finally displayed on the panel B displayed at the top. The probability that the set value is “1” is high, and the set value “1” is suggested.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (B), when the setting value is “2”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 4 to 7 in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C. Is relatively high (if the jackpot is selected with a total probability of 60%, if out of place, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is “2”, the execution ratio of the super reach C is high, so that the icon image “▲” is finally displayed on the panel C displayed at the top. , The probability of the set value “2” is high, and the set value “2” is suggested.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), when the setting value is “3”, the icon patterns 5 and 7 to 9 in which the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D are displayed. The selection ratio is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a loss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is “3”, the execution ratio of the super reach D is high, so that the icon image “★” is finally displayed on the panel D displayed at the top. , The probability of the set value “3” is high, and the set value “3” is suggested.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A), when the icon pattern 2 is selected when the set value is “1”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the big hit for a certain combination of the set value and the icon pattern (in this example, the combination of the set value “1” and the icon pattern 2). Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, when the setting value is “1”, the icon pattern 2 may be selected at a low rate even if the setting value is “1”. May be.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A) and (B), when the set value is “1” or “2”, the ratio of the icon pattern 9 being selected is extremely 1%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), when the setting value is “3”, the ratio of the icon pattern 9 being selected is relatively high (30% probability for big hits). In case of loss, it is selected with a probability of 20%). Therefore, in this example, when the icon image “★” is displayed on all the panel images B to D in the super reach, the expectation for the setting value “3” is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the set value having a high degree of advantage with respect to a combination of a specific set value and an icon pattern (in this example, a combination of the set value “3” and the icon pattern 9). For example, when the icon pattern 9 is selected, the setting value “3” may be determined.

  In this example, as an example in which the degree of expectation for the setting value differs depending on the combination of a specific setting value and the icon pattern, the setting value “3” is set for the combination of the setting value “3” and the icon pattern 9. Although the case where the expectation degree with respect to becomes high was shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, a combination of a setting value “1” that increases the expectation level for the setting value “1” and an icon pattern, or a combination of a setting value “2” that increases the expectation level for the setting value “2” and an icon pattern May be provided.

  In this example, an icon image is displayed in super reach and a suggestion effect during reach is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the reach suggestion effect may be executed in a full rotation reach in which all three decorative symbols rotate in a state where all the left middle right decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern. Further, in this case, for example, a combination of a specific set value and the full rotation reach may be configured such that a sense of expectation with respect to a set value having a high advantage is increased.

  Also, the types of icon patterns are not limited to the icon patterns 1 to 9 shown in this example. For example, in this example, a case where icon images are displayed on all three panel images B to D other than the panel image A as in icon patterns 2 to 9 is shown, but the panel images B to D are not necessarily displayed. It is not necessary to display the icon image on all, and it may be configured such that there is an icon pattern in which the icon image is displayed only on any one or two of the panel images B to D.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence and effect mode of the game suggestion effect (step 121IWS606).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the pre-read zone effect executing flag is set (step 121IWS607). If the pre-read zone effect execution flag is set, CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the change display to be started this time is the change display of the first special symbol (step 121IWS608). Whether or not to start the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, the first symbol variation designation command transmitted at the start of the variable display (designates to start the variable display of the first special symbol) It can be determined by confirming whether or not an effect control command is received. If the first special symbol variation display is to be started, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter (step 121IWS609).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the pre-read zone effect number counter after the addition is 1 (step 121IWS610). If the value of the pre-read zone effect number counter is 1 (that is, if the first change pre-read zone effect is executed), the effect control CPU 120 determines the first effect pattern as the pre-read zone effect pattern (step 121IWS611). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS616.

  If the value of the pre-read zone effect number counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variation display is a big hit (step 121IWS612). Whether or not the display is a variable display that is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a variable display that is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a big hit prefetch zone effect pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter as a table for determining the prefetch zone effect pattern (step) 121IWS613). If the display is not a big win, the effect control CPU 120 selects a prefetch zone effect pattern determination table for detachment according to the value of the prefetch zone effect number counter as a table for determining the prefetch zone effect pattern. (Step 121 IWS 614). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected prefetch zone effect pattern determination table, and determines a prefetch zone effect pattern (step 121IWS615).

  20-28 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the prefetch zone effect pattern determination table. Among these, FIG. 20-28 (A) shows a specific example of the big hit prefetch zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 2 (when the prefetch zone effect of the second variation is executed). ing. FIG. 20-28 (B) shows a specific example of the pre-read zone effect pattern determination table for deviation when the value of the pre-read zone effect counter is 2 (when the pre-read zone effect of the second variation is executed). Yes. FIG. 20-28 (C) shows a specific example of the big hit prefetch zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 3 (when the third variation of the prefetch zone effect is executed). Yes. Also, FIG. 20-28 (D) shows a specific example of the pre-read zone effect pattern determination table for deviation when the value of the pre-read zone effect counter is 3 (when the pre-read zone effect of the third variation is executed). Yes. FIG. 20-28 (E) shows a specific example of the big hit prefetch zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 4 (when the prefetch zone effect of the fourth change is executed). Yes. FIG. 20-28 (F) shows a specific example of the pre-read zone effect pattern determination table for deviation when the value of the pre-read zone effect counter is 4 (when the pre-read zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 20-28, in this example, there are three types of prefetch zone effect patterns 1 to 3 as prefetch zone effect patterns. The pre-read zone effect pattern 1 is a pattern that suggests that it is the set value “1” if it is a big hit in the current variation display. In addition, the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 is a pattern that suggests that it is the set value “2” if it is a big hit in the current variation display. In addition, the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is a pattern that suggests that it is the set value “3” if it is a big hit in the current variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 20-28, in this example, when the value of the pre-read zone effect counter is 2 (when the pre-read zone effect of the second change is executed), the set value is “1” and a big hit is obtained. The pre-read zone effect pattern 1 is selected at a high rate of 80%. Further, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 3 (when the prefetch zone effect of the third change is executed), when the set value is “2” and the big hit, the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 is as high as 80%. Select by percentage. Further, when the value of the prefetch zone effect counter is 4 (when the prefetch zone effect of the fourth variation is executed), the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is set to 80% higher when the set value is “3” and the big hit is achieved. Select by percentage. Therefore, in the present example, when the setting value “1” is suggested in the second change look-ahead zone effect and a big hit is made, the accuracy of the setting value “1” is high and set in the third change look-ahead zone effect. When the value “2” is suggested and the big hit is made, the accuracy of the setting value “2” is high, and when the setting value “3” is suggested and the big hit is given by the pre-read zone effect of the fourth variation The accuracy of the set value “3” is configured to be high.

  Note that the configuration of the prefetch zone effect pattern determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to use a different look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table or to distribute the judgment values differently depending on whether or not the current change display is a change display of a pre-read zone effect notice target. You may do it. In this case, for example, if the current variation display is a variation display subject to the advance notice of the pre-read zone effect, if the current variation display is out of date, the pre-read zone effect pattern 3 suggesting the set value “3” or the like is high. You may comprise so that the pattern which suggests a setting may become easy to be selected.

  Next, if the execution of the variation pattern, the prefetch zone effect, the reach suggestion effect, or the game suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prefetch zone effect (for example, the prefetch zone effect pattern) or the reach. A process table corresponding to the medium suggestion effect (for example, icon pattern) and the game suggestion effect is selected (step 121IWS616). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 121IWS617).

  The process table is a table in which process data that is referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the image display device 5 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 121IWS 618).

  In this feature portion 121IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variable pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command, but the effect control CPU 120 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 121IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes one command at the time of start winning (symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number addition designation command) stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area, The contents of the command storage area at the start winning prize are shifted (step 121IWS620).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 121IWS621), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Indication suggestion processing during game)
FIG. 20-29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game suggestion effect determination process (step 121IWS606). The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 121IWS 702) when it is in the special period (Y in step 121IWS701), and is not in the special period. In the case (N in Step 121IWS701), the second game suggestion effect determination table is selected (Step 121IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, a special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it can be confirmed in step 121IWS 701 whether or not it is during the special period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS 704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode for execution are determined (step 121IWS705).

  FIG. 20-30 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-30 (B) is a second game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In each of the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

  In addition, with respect to the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A) The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger. In other words, the second rendering mode has a high degree of reliability with respect to being set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first rendering mode.

  Also, in the first and second game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), the game suggestion effect in the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a special period can be provided, and the interest can be enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (appearance of character C) may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, the setting value “3” is determined by executing the game suggestion effect in the third effect mode.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode A (step 121IWS706). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 121IWS707).

  When the processing of steps 121IWS706 to S707 is executed, the feature unit 121IW has a setting value that is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is A. The presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio itself determined to execute the suggestion effect during gaming is low and the ratio determined as the second effect mode Is the lowest and is not determined to be the third effect mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the suggestive effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged even though an unfavorable set value is set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS708). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C (step 121IWS709).

  FIG. 20-30 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-30 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. There is also no case of being determined as the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS708 to S709, in this feature 121IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of being present, the second effect mode and the third effect mode are executed to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed and the player is discouraged, and the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the game.

  By executing the process of step 121IWS708, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a game is executed and the player is disappointed and disappointed is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during game may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the game suggestion effect is set to be lower than the set value “1” of the game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIG. 20-30 (A), (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 2nd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of setting value 1, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be determined, The possibility of the value 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is determined. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the specific set value may be determined. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In this feature 121IW, it is possible to execute a game suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value. This is because the game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode). 3 execution modes are different), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, and the third production mode are different according to the set value, and only the specific production mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, although it is comprised so that a suggestion during game of the common aspect (for example, 1st effect aspect) can be performed by a special period and a non-special period, it is not restricted to such a structure. It may be possible to execute a different suggestion effect during the game. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, the feature unit 121IW is configured such that the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect during the game and the effect mode in the execution are different depending on whether the special period or the non-special period is set and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence or absence of reach production, the type of reach production, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous production, the type of pseudo-continuous production, the display result is a big hit Depending on whether or not the game suggestion effect is executed, whether or not it is executed may be different.

  For example, the suggestion effect during game may be executable only when the variation pattern includes a reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter is likely to have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestion effect during the game. Alternatively, the degree of reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed increases, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed is increased. You may make it high.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-continuous effect (or the number of pseudo-continuous times is smaller than that of the former), the former is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. It may be made higher, or the reliability when the game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased and is executed. The reliability may be increased.

  In addition, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. The degree of reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed is increased, and the degree of reliability when the effect is executed may be increased. .

(Direction processing during variable display)
20-31 is a flowchart showing a variable display effect process (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121IWS801) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 121IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 121IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS804). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 121IWS805).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach is being executed (step 121IWS806). Whether or not the super reach is being executed can be determined by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121IWS619 of the variable display start setting process, for example. If the super reach is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (step 121IWS807). If the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (that is, if the push button 31B is in an ON state), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of operations of the push button 31B (number of repeated hits). The value of the operation number counter is incremented by 1 (step 121IWS808).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach type is determined to be super reach A (step 121IWS809). If it is determined to be super reach A, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach A (that is, if determined to be super reach B to D), the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 ( Step 121IWS810). If the value of the operation counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to delete the panel image A if the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A is displayed on the image display device 5 ( Step 121IWS811).

  If the super-reach B to D is determined by executing the processing of steps 121IWS 809 to S811, the display is started in the state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and then the push is performed. The panel image A is erased based on the button 31B being operated once.

  If the value of the operation counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach type is determined as super reach B (step 121IWS812). If it is determined to be super reach B, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach B (that is, if determined to be super reach C to D), the effect control CPU 120 has the value of the operation number counter at the first predetermined number (for example, 10). (Step 121IWS813). If the value of the operation number counter is the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image B if the panel image B corresponding to the super reach B is displayed on the image display device 5. (Step 121IWS814).

  When the super-reach C to D is determined by executing the processing of steps 121IWS812 to S814, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and the panel image A Is erased, the panel image B is erased based on the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times) of continuous push operations of the push button 31B.

  If the value of the operation number counter is not the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach type is determined to be super reach C (step 121IWS815). If it is determined to be super reach C, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach C (that is, if it is determined to be super reach D), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the operation number counter is a second predetermined number (for example, 20). It is confirmed whether or not (step 121IWS816). If the value of the operation number counter is the second predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image C if the panel image C corresponding to the super reach C is displayed on the image display device 5. (Step 121IWS817).

  When the process of steps 121IWS815 to S817 is executed and the super reach D is determined, the display is started with the panel images A to D overlapped on the image display device 5, and the panel image A and the panel are displayed. After the image B is erased, the panel image C is erased based on the second predetermined number (for example, 20 times) of continuous push buttons 31B.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the operation valid period during super reach has ended (step 121IWS818). Whether or not the operation valid period has ended can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the operation valid period has not expired, the process proceeds to step 121IWS826. If the operation valid period has ended, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (step 121IWS819). If the value of the operation number counter is not 1 or more (if the value of the operation number counter is 0 (that is, if the push button 31B has not been operated once within the effective operation period during super reach)) The process proceeds to step 121IWS824.

  If the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (that is, if the push button 31B is operated at least once within the operation effective period during super reach), the effect control CPU 120 uses the super reach type as the super reach type. It is confirmed whether or not the reach C is determined (step 121IWS820). If it is determined that it is super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to forcibly erase the panel image B if the panel image B is still displayed on the image display device 5 (step 121IWS821). Note that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so that at least the panel image A should have been deleted at this stage.

  If not determined as super reach C, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is determined as super reach D as the type of super reach (step 121IWS822). If it is determined that it is super reach D, the CPU 120 for effect control forcibly erases the panel image B or the panel image C if the panel image B or the panel image C is still displayed on the image display device 5. Control is performed (step 121IWS823). Note that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so that at least the panel image A should have been deleted at this stage.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined to be super reach D (that is, if determined to be super reach A or super reach B), the process proceeds to step 121IWS824.

  In this example, when the process of steps 121IWS819 to S823 is executed and the player is determined to be super reach C or super reach D, the player operates the push button 31B to the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number. If the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed, the panel image C and the panel image D are forcibly displayed at the top. For example, if it is determined as super reach C, the panel image C is forcibly displayed at the top, and if it is determined as super reach D, the panel image D is forcibly displayed. The state is displayed at the top. On the other hand, when it is determined that the super reach is BD, and the player does not operate the push button 31B even once (in this case, the panel image A is still displayed at the top). ), The panel image A is not changed while it is displayed at the top.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process table corresponding to the super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the top of the image display device 5 (step 121IWS824). For example, when the panel image A is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach A. When the panel image B is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach B. When the panel image C is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach C. When the panel image D is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach D. Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 121IWS825).

  Thereafter, in accordance with the process data switched in step 121IWS 824, the processing of step 121IWS 805 is executed at the timing of the next and subsequent timer interruptions, thereby producing effects that develop into super reach AD.

  It should be noted that the value of the operation number counter may be configured to be cleared to 0 when, for example, the super reach is terminated or the variable display is terminated.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step 121IWS826), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” (step 121IWS827), and ends the variable display effect processing.

(Determination processing during big hit)
FIG. 20-33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit effect determining process. The big hit effect determination process is executed in the big hit release pre-processing (step S114). In the big hit effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined (step 121IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

  In step S121IWS902, when the variation display is performed for a specific time (100 times in this example) from the start of the game (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific time), the first shown in FIG. 20-34 (A). When the big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and it is not during the specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined. The “game start time” here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, in this feature part 121IW, the period from when the game is started until when the variable display is executed a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from when the game is started until the variation display is executed a specific time (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from when the game is started until the fluctuation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the game starts). It is also possible to use a big hit suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

  20-34 (A) and (B), the first and second big hit suggestion effect determination tables are executed in the order of set value “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of being processed becomes high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous setting value is set by executing the big hit suggestion effect.

  Moreover, about the 2nd production mode and the 3rd production mode, the ratio which is executed in order of setting value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, execution ratio between setting values in specific period and non-specific period The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, a motivation for playing a game during a specific period can be given, and interest can be enhanced. In addition, not only the structure of this characteristic part 121IW but the big hit suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), the fourth effect may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

  In the feature section 121IW, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), the decorative symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B1), a speech C image (“high setting !?”) 121IW102 is displayed.

  Further, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), after the decorative symbol that is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, As shown in 20-36 (C1), a speech D image (“high setting confirmed”) 121IW105 is displayed.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed but the set value command has not been received normally due to a command being missed or garbled), the production control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS903). Whether or not the production mode A is in effect can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 121IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

  When the processing of steps 121IWS903 to S904 is executed, the feature unit 121IW has a setting value that is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the rendering mode A. The presence / absence of execution of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the setting of an unfavorable setting value, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage are executed with the big hit suggesting stage and the player is disappointed. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in games.

  If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS905). Whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set, for example. If it is the production mode C, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the big hit suggestion production and the production mode using the big hit suggestion production determination table for the production mode C (step 121IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

  20-34 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggesting effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-34 (C), in the big hit suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio itself determined to execute the big hit suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 121IWS905 to S906, in this feature 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the production mode C, an unfavorable setting value is set. In spite of being present, the second stage, the third stage, and the third stage can be used to reduce the situation in which the big hit suggesting stage is executed and disappointing the player and discouraging the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, when it is not the production mode C (that is, when the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 proceeds to step 121IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the production mode B, it is restricted so as not to perform the big hit suggestion production.

  By executing the processing of step 121IWS905, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode B, Although a disadvantageous set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a big hit is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even in the case where the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to execute the big hit suggestion effect at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the big hit suggestion effect is set lower overall than the set value “1” of the big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B) is used. The presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit may be determined.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the example shown to FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), Only the specific production | generation aspect (for example, 3rd production | generation aspect) of several production | generation aspects is performed according to a setting value. You may make it a ratio differ.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (A), when a big hit is made in a specific period, it is configured to always execute the big hit suggestion effect, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, you may make it vary the ratio which is not performed according to a setting value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), the ratio that the big hit suggestion effect is not executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio that is not executed according to the set value is different. You may make it let.

  Moreover, in this feature part 121IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, it is configured so that a big hit suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image indicating a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or notice effect is executed.

  In this feature 121IW, it is possible to execute a big hit suggestion effect at a different rate depending on the set value. This is a big hit suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third The execution ratio of the production mode and the fourth production mode is different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set value, and the set value. This is a concept including that the execution ratio differs only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory effect (step 121IWS907).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 121IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 121IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 121IW101 moves to the front of the image display device 5. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In this feature 121IW, since the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 121IW101 that has actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 The dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not obscured. However, if the movable member 121IW101 is operated by the effect effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 121IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the suggestive effect during the big hit may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 121IWS907, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34 (D), when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the accessory effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and reducing the interest. Also, with such a configuration, even if the big hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

  When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the accessory effect is changed (for example, the accessory effect is performed during the fanfare period, It is also possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 121IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at the position overlapping the speech image by the big hit suggestion effect), or the big hit The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the accessory effect may be limited by reducing the execution ratio of the accessory effect. Moreover, you may make it restrict | limit execution of an effect production only for a specific period. Moreover, not only the example shown to FIG. 20-34 (D), but also when a big hit suggestion production | presentation is performed, you may make it perform an accessory effect in a low ratio.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the accessory effect (N in Step 121IWS908), the presence / absence of the light guide plate effect is determined (Step 121IWS909).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, there is provided a light guide plate 121IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light, and a light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate. In addition, it is assumed that there is provided a reflection portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 121IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 121IW103 by the light emitter and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine. And it can perform the light-guide plate effect which radiate | emits light to the front surface of a game machine from the reflection part provided in the light-guide plate 121IW103 by light-emitting a light-emitting body. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, and “big hit” Appears. Further, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

  In step 121IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios according to the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when executed. The Specifically, when the suggestion effect during the jackpot of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being high is high, and the suggestion during the jackpot of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the ratio at which the light guide plate effect is executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the production mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the ratio that the light guide plate effect is executed is high, and the big hit suggestive effect is difficult to visually recognize. Yes. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 121IW104 is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect in the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is undesirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit suggestion effect during the big hit of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period and the suggestion effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Small hit end effect processing)
20-37 is a flowchart showing the small hit end effect process (step S175) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the effect period measurement timer by 1 (step 121IWS1001). And it is confirmed whether the production period measurement timer after subtraction timed out (step 121IWS1002). The effect period measurement timer is set based on confirmation of reception of the small hit end designation command in the small hit effect processing (see step S174), for example.

  If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in Step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step 121IWS1003). Further, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the image display device 5 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component). Control of the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 121IWS1004).

  Next, if the process timer has not timed out (NO at step 121IWS1005), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step 121IWS1005), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS1006). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step 121IWS1007).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect stage determination table corresponding to the small hit type as a table for determining whether or not to change the effect stage after the end of the small hit game and the type of the changed effect stage. (Step 121 IWS1008). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected effect stage determination table, and determines whether or not to change the effect stage after the small hit game ends and the type of the effect stage after the change. (Step 121IWS1009).

  20-38 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the effect stage determination table. Among these, FIG. 20-38 (A) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type A. FIG. 20-38 (B) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type is B. FIG. 20-38 (C) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type is C.

  As shown in FIG. 20-38, determination values are assigned to the production stage determination table for the production stage no change, production stage A change, production stage B change, and production stage C change. Yes. When the production stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, when the setting value is “1”, the ratio of the production stage A is high. Therefore, in this example, when the stage is changed to the stage A after the end of the small hit game, it is suggested that the setting value is “1”. Further, when the production stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, when the setting value is “2”, the ratio of the production stage B is high. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the setting value is “2” when the stage is changed to the production stage B after the end of the small hit game. In addition, when the production stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the production stage C may be changed only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, in this example, when the stage is changed to the production stage C after the end of the small hit game, it is suggested that the setting value is “3”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (C), in this example, in the case of the small hit type C, when the set value is “1”, the stage A is selected at a high rate of 50%. When the setting value is “2”, the production stage B is selected at a high rate of 60%, and when the setting value is “3”, the production stage C is selected at a high rate of 50%. Yes. Therefore, in this example, the setting value suggestion by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C is most reliable. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of the small hit type A, when the set value is “1”, there is only 30% of the stage to select the effect stage A, and when the set value is “2”, the effect stage. The ratio of selecting B is only 40%, and when the setting value is “3”, the ratio of selecting stage stage C is only 30%. Accordingly, in this example, the setting value suggestion by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the stage is not necessarily changed after the end of the small hit game, and it may be determined without changing the stage, but the setting value “1”. Depending on which of “3”, the ratio determined without changing the stage is different (in other words, the ratio of changing the stage is also different).

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, an effect stage C that is determined to be the set value “3” is provided, and a specific effect stage (in this example, an effect stage is determined). The rate of change to stage C) is different. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, even when the set value is “1” or “2”, the stage may be changed to the stage C at a low rate.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the lottery process by the effect control CPU 120 shows the case where the presence / absence of the effect stage is changed or the determination stage type of the effect stage after the change is changed. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the gaming machine is configured such that the small hit probability varies depending on which of the set values “1” to “3”, the stage change is caused by the fact that the small hit probability varies depending on the set value. You may comprise so that the determination ratio of the presence or absence of a stage and the kind of production stage after a change may be varied. In addition, for example, it is configured so that the presence / absence of the stage change for each small hit type and the determination stage ratio of the stage stage after the change are the same, and any of the set values “1” to “3” Accordingly, by determining the small hit type according to different ratios, it may be configured so that the presence / absence of the production stage is changed or the decision stage of the type of the production stage after the change is made different.

  When it is determined to change the effect stage (Y in step 121IWS1010), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the changed effect stage. Control to change is performed (step 121IWS1011).

  In this feature 121IW, when a small hit occurs and the stage is changed, a background image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until the next small hit occurs. And

  In addition, not only in the mode shown in this example, for example, after changing the stage, after a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the variable display, the display returns to the normal stage and returns to the normal background image. It may be configured. In addition, for example, the stage may be configured to change every time a small hit occurs, and once the stage is changed, the stage is not changed even if a small hit occurs. It may be configured.

  In addition, in this example, when the stage is changed after the small hit game ends, a background image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays. It cannot be caught. For example, it is not always necessary to perform the display over a plurality of fluctuation displays, and an effect that suggests a set value is executed only once after the small hit game ends (a single effect that suggests a set value is executed). It may be configured.

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 121IWS1012), and ends the small hit end effect process.

  Next, an example of effects in the feature 121IW will be described. First, an effect mode in the case of changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game will be described. 20-39 and FIG. 20-40 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the small hit game ends. In addition, in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40, an effect mode shall transition in order of (A) (B) (C).

  First, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-39, it is assumed that the set value is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20-39 (A), the left, middle and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. It is assumed that a symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols “357”) is confirmed and displayed and a small hit game is executed. Then, it is decided to change to the stage A that suggests that the set value is “1”, and the image display device 5 corresponds to the stage A as shown in FIG. 20-39 (C). Assume that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-39 (C), the case where the background image corresponding to the production stage A is changed to an image in which a group of fish 121IW106 is swimming in the sea is shown.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 20-40, it is assumed that the setting value is “3”. As shown in FIG. 20-40 (A), the variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 20-40 (B), the small hits of the small hit type C are used as stop symbols for the decorative symbols. Assume that a symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols of “579”) is confirmed and displayed and a small hit game is executed. Then, it is determined to change to the stage stage C that suggests that the set value is “3”, and the image display device 5 corresponds to the stage stage C as shown in FIG. 20-40 (C). Assume that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-40 (C), the case where the background image corresponding to the production stage C is changed to an image in which the rocket 121IW107 flies toward the moon 121IW108 in outer space is shown.

  20-39 and 20-40 are merely examples. For example, in the case of the small hit type A, the small hits in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and 20-40 (B) are shown. A small hit symbol of type A (for example, a combination of symbols of “135”) may be fixedly displayed. For example, when the stage is changed to the stage B, the background image corresponding to the stage B (for example, a flock of birds flying in the air in FIGS. 20-39C and 20-40C). The image may be changed to an image such as

  20-39 shows the case where the stage is changed to the stage A, but in this example, the stage is changed to the stage B at a low rate even when the set value is “1”. (See FIG. 20-38). 20-40 shows the case where the stage is changed to the stage stage C, but in this example, the stage A and stage stage are produced at a low rate even when the setting value is “3”. It may be changed to B (see FIG. 20-38).

  In addition, the production mode in the case of changing the production stage after the end of the small hit game is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40. For example, a battle effect is executed at the end of a small hit game, and if the teammate wins the battle, the stage is changed and the background image is switched, and the set value is suggested. If the teammate character loses the battle, the stage The background image may not be changed. Various production modes are conceivable.

  In this example, the setting value is suggested by changing the stage after the small hit game ends. However, the method for suggesting the set value in relation to the small hit is shown in this example. It cannot be caught. For example, when a small hit game period is secured to some extent, it may be configured to suggest a set value by causing a predetermined character or the like associated with the set value to appear during the small hit game. . Further, for example, when a plurality of combinations of small hit symbols (decorative symbol combinations) are provided, the small hit symbol is configured to be associated with the set value, and any of the small hit symbols is stopped and displayed. The setting value may be suggested depending on whether or not. In addition, for example, when it is configured to be able to shift to the so-called probability variation latency state after suddenly large hit or small hit, it can be configured to suggest a set value depending on whether the probability change latency period after small hit is long or short, or the probability change latency period An effect that suggests a set value may be executed.

  Further, in this example, the case is shown in which the production stage is changed as the predetermined condition is satisfied when the small hit game ends, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed, and the production stage may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established based on winning the lottery. Further, for example, the stage may be configured so that a predetermined condition is established based on the fact that the number of executions of the variable display has reached a predetermined number.

  Next, an effect aspect of the prefetch zone effect will be described. 20-41 and FIGS. 20-42 are explanatory views for explaining the effect of the prefetch zone effect. In FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, it is assumed that the effect mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C).

  As shown in FIG. 20-41 (A), a new start winning to the first start winning opening occurs during the decorative symbol variation display, and four first hold indications are accumulated in the first hold memory display unit 121IW109. Suppose that it became the state. Then, it is assumed that the execution of the pre-read zone effect is determined based on the occurrence of the start winning at the first start winning opening.

  Next, when the first variation display is executed after the start winning is given to the first start winning opening, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (B), the prefetch zone effect based on the first effect pattern is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (B), the character display 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 121IW111 of “Zone rush!” Is displayed as a dialogue of the character 121IW110. .

  If the first variation display is a big hit, the pre-read zone effect is terminated as it is, and the subsequent effect screen of FIG. 20-41 (C) is not transferred (therefore, in this case, the pre-read zone is not displayed). Although the production is performed, the set value is not substantially suggested).

  Next, it is assumed that the prefetch zone effect pattern 1 is determined as the prefetch zone effect pattern when the second variable display is executed after the start winning prize is generated in the first start winning opening (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (C), the prefetch zone effect based on the prefetch zone effect pattern 1 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (C), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is set to “If set right now? A character display 121IW112 is displayed.

  Note that if the second variation display is a big hit, the prefetch zone effect is terminated as it is, and the subsequent effect screen of FIG. 20-41 (D) is not transferred. In this case, “If set right now, setting“ 1 ”? It is suggested that the setting value “1” is set based on the occurrence of the big hit when the character display 121IW112 of “” is displayed.

  Next, it is assumed that the pre-read zone effect pattern 2 is determined as the pre-read zone effect pattern when the third variable display is executed after the start winning to the first start winning opening is generated (see FIG. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (D), the prefetch zone effect based on the prefetch zone effect pattern 2 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (D), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is “If this is the case, setting“ 2 ”? A character display 121IW113 of “” is displayed.

  Note that if the third variation display is a big hit, the prefetch zone effect is terminated as it is, and the subsequent effect screen of FIG. 20-41 (D) is not transferred. In this case, “If it is right now, setting“ 2 ”? It is suggested that the setting value “2” is set based on the occurrence of the big hit when the character display 121IW113 of “” is displayed.

  Next, it is assumed that the pre-read zone effect pattern 3 is determined as the pre-read zone effect pattern when the fourth variable display is executed after the start winning to the first start winning opening is generated (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (E), the prefetch zone effect based on the prefetch zone effect pattern 3 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-42 (E), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is set to “If set right now? A character display 121IW114 is displayed.

  If the third variation display is a big hit, the prefetch zone effect is terminated. In this case, “If set right now, setting“ 3 ”? It is suggested that the set value “3” is set based on the occurrence of the big hit when the character display 121IW114 is displayed. Further, in this example, the prefetch zone effect is also ended when a big hit does not occur in the third variation display (therefore, in this case, the so-called “gaze prefetch zone effect” is executed). ).

  20-41 and 20-42 are only examples. For example, even when the second variation display is executed after the start winning prize, a low ratio is shown in FIG. 20-41 (C). In some cases, a pre-read zone effect that suggests setting values “2” and “3” may be executed (see FIG. 20-28). Also, for example, even when the third variation display is executed after the start winning prize, the pre-read zone effect suggesting the set values “1” and “3” is executed at a low rate in FIG. 20-41 (D). (See FIGS. 20-28). Further, for example, even when the fourth variation display is executed after the start winning prize, the look-ahead zone effect that suggests the set values “1” and “2” is executed at a low rate in FIG. 20-42 (E). (See FIGS. 20-28).

  In addition, in this example, in the case where the first variation display is executed after the start winning prize, the pre-read zone effect is executed based on the first effect pattern, and the character display 121IW111 of “Zone rush!” Is displayed. However, even when the first variation display is executed, the effects suggesting the set values “1” to “3” in the same manner as in FIGS. 20-41 (C) to 20 -42 (E). May be configured to execute.

  Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the set value is suggested as a predetermined condition established based on the occurrence of a big hit during execution of the prefetch zone effect, but this is not the only mode. For example, it may be configured such that a predetermined value is suggested as a predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined character is displayed or a lamp or LED emits light during execution of the prefetch zone effect, Can be considered.

  Further, in this example, the case where the pre-read zone effect is executed over a plurality of variation displays has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting value is suggested in the effect performed during one variation display. You may comprise. For example, a gauge display in which the indicator moves as time elapses is displayed on the image display device 5 during one variation display, and at what point the indicator is in the gauge display, a certain achievement condition is established ( For example, a setting value may be suggested based on winning a battle or clearing a mission.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, when the pre-read zone effect is executed in a plurality of variable displays, for each variable display, “set now“ 1 ” ? "Or" If set right now, setting "2"? " The case where the current set value is suggested by displaying a character display such as “” is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, during a single fluctuation display, “If you hit now, setting“ 1 ”? "Or" If set right now, setting "2"? " ”, Etc., are displayed in order, and the current setting value is suggested by the content of the character display that was finally displayed when the big hit occurred at the end of the variable display. Good. For example, “If it is right now, setting“ 2 ”? In the state where the character display of “” is displayed, if the variation display ends and a big hit occurs, it is suggested that the setting value is “2”. In the state where the character display of “” is displayed, when the variation display ends and a big hit occurs, the setting value “3” may be suggested. Further, when the character display is sequentially switched and displayed during one variation display, for example, the character display may be switched at the timing of occurrence of the notice effect or the timing of development of the reach effect. Good. Further, for example, in the case of variable display with pseudo-continuations, the character display may be switched at the timing of re-variation.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect aspect of a suggestion effect during reach. 20-43 and FIGS. 20-44 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect mode of the suggestion effect during reach. In FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, it is assumed that the effect mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C).

  As shown in FIG. 20-43 (A), when starting the variable display of decorative symbols, executing Super Reach D as the type of Super Reach based on the fact that Super Reach is specified by the change pattern. (See FIGS. 20-25), and the icon pattern 5 is determined as the icon pattern (see FIGS. 20-26 (A) to (D)).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, symbol “7”), and normal reach occurs. Next, at the start timing of super reach, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (C), in the image display device 5, panel image A121IW115 corresponding to super reach A is first, and panel image B121IW116 corresponding to super reach B is displayed. The panel image C121IW117 corresponding to the super reach C and the panel image C121IW 118 corresponding to the super reach D are displayed in a state where they are sequentially overlapped. Further, based on the determination that the icon pattern is 5, the icon image “●” 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116, the icon image “▲” 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. An icon image “★” 121IW121 is displayed.

  Next, when an operation of the push button 31B by the player is detected once, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (D), the top panel image A121IW115 is deleted, and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top. .

  Next, when the player hits the push button 31B repeatedly and the number of consecutive hits reaches the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times), as shown in FIG. 20-44 (E), the top panel image B121IW116 is deleted, The panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top.

  Next, when the player hits the push button 31B repeatedly and the number of consecutive hits reaches the second predetermined number (for example, 20 times), as shown in FIG. 20-44 (F), the top panel image C121IW117 is deleted, Only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the time of super reach development, as shown in FIG. 20-44 (G), the last remaining panel image D121IW118 is displayed on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the display is performed. As shown in 44 (H), the effect of developing to the super reach D is executed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the icon image “★” 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118 that is finally displayed at the top, so that the current set value is It is suggested that the possibility of “3” is high.

  20-43 and 20-44 show the case where the execution of super reach D is determined. For example, when the execution of super reach A is determined, the push button Even if 31B is operated, the panel image A121IW115 shown in FIG. 20-43 (C) does not change as it is displayed at the top, and the panel image A121IW115 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the timing of super reach is reached. A display of an aspect that expands on the entire screen is performed, and an effect of an aspect that develops to super reach A is executed. For example, when execution of super reach B is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image B121IW116 shown in FIG. 20-43 (D) is changed only to the state displayed at the top. First, when it is time to develop Super Reach, the display of the aspect in which the panel image B121IW116 is enlarged on the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is performed, and the effect of the aspect of developing to Super Reach B is executed. For example, when execution of super reach C is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image C121IW117 shown in FIG. 20-44 (E) is changed only to the state displayed at the top. First, when the super reach development timing is reached, a display in which the panel image C121IW117 is enlarged on the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed, and an effect of developing the super reach C is executed.

  Further, for example, although the execution of super reach D is determined, the player does not operate the push button 31B at all or does not repeatedly hit the second predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 20-44 (F). There may be a case where only the panel image D121IW118 is not displayed. In this case, in this example, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. Developed into Super Reach D. However, if the push button 31B has never been operated and the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the top, in this example, the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the top. Instead, it develops into Super Reach A.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, even when the push button 31B is not operated once, it may be configured to forcibly develop into the super reach D. Even if it is determined that super reach D is to be executed, if only the panel image 121IW118 is not displayed, the final display depends on the panel image displayed at the top. It may be configured to develop into super reach B or super reach C.

  Further, for example, when the player does not operate the push button 31B, it may be configured to develop into a super reach that has nothing to do with the suggestion of the set value.

  20-43 and 20-44 show a case where icon images 121IW119-121 are displayed and a suggestion effect during reach is executed. For example, it is determined as icon pattern 1 and is suggested during reach. When it is determined that the effect is not executed, only the panel images are displayed in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (G), and the icon images are not displayed.

  Note that, in this example, the case where the icon image is not displayed at all when the reach suggestion effect is not executed during the super reach is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the suggestion effect during reach is not executed, an item image that is not related to the set value may be displayed on each panel image so as not to be related to the suggestion of the set value. .

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the panel image is deleted one by one in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B, so that one stage of super reach production is performed. Although the case where the setting value is suggested in the effect of the aspect that goes up is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when displaying a meter display that gradually increases the meter level according to the player's operation, it is configured to suggest a set value by performing icon image or telop display corresponding to the set value Also good. In addition, for example, the reach production itself such as super reach does not change step by step, and only the icon image or telop display corresponding to the set value changes step by step according to the player's operation. May be. In addition, for example, it is not always necessary to involve the player's operation, and the icon image and the telop display corresponding to the set value may be configured to change step by step regardless of the operation. Conceivable.

  Also, for example, the reach suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 may be related to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the reach suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 is executed, and a big hit occurs in the change display, the setting value suggested in the reach suggestion effect during the reach is determined, Or you may comprise so that it may become more than the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect during reach.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (E), icon images are also displayed so as to be visible for panel images other than the panel image displayed at the top. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the icon image may be displayed only in the panel image displayed at the top. In this case, for example, in FIG. 20-43 (C), panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the top, so that panel image B121IW116 to panel image D121IW118 are all displayed with no icon image displayed. Then, in FIG. 20-43 (D), when the panel image A121IW115 is deleted and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116. Then, in FIG. 20-44 (E), when the panel image B121IW116 is deleted and the panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117. Then, in FIG. 20-44 (F), when the panel image C121IW117 is deleted and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed, the icon image 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118. May be.

  In this example, for example, even though the execution of super reach D is determined, the player does not repeatedly hit the push button 31B up to the second predetermined number and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. If there is no change, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the head if the push button 31B is operated at least once. However, when the icon image is displayed only for the panel image displayed at the top as described above, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are not displayed at the top. Image B121IW116 and panel image C121IW View 17 of icon images may be constructed so as not. Even if the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly deleted, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are displayed in order for an extremely short time (for example, 1 second), so that they are extremely short. The icon image may be displayed on the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 only for a time (for example, 1 second).

  In this feature 121IW, the effect effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed in preference to the big hit suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. In addition, when a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit suggestion effect (for example, a specific effect aspect of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is an aspect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. The priority may be given to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect, it is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. You may make it display an image preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  In this feature 121IW, decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative symbols are variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having decorative symbols arranged on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative symbol on the surface (that is, the decorative symbol may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-like or belt-like movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal time at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the feature). May occur). Therefore, in the first-time fluctuation after changing the setting, a light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio is increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  Further, in this feature part 121IW, the effect effect and light guide plate effect are configured so that the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit can be reduced, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when an undesirable suggestion is made to the player. For example, when even-numbered initial outcomes are displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the suggestion effect during game of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, it is possible to increase the ratio of executing the effect effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the present invention is not limited to an effect effect or a light guide plate effect, but includes an effect including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitter such as a decoration LED to emit light in a predetermined manner. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made difficult to notice).

  Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 121IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on a measurement result (measurement result using a measurement timer or a real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific manner. Thus, the setting may be suggested.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) that suggests setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory being 0 or the number of start winnings exceeding the upper limit hold memory number is generated. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control, etc.) based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a predetermined operation effective period. (E.g., light emission control of the lamp) may be executed.

  Although the characteristic part 121IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the feature part 121IW, the form in which the security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 121IW001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side. Also good. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-45 (A) and 20-45 (B) as a first modification, a security cover 121IW500B composed of a short piece 121IW500Ba and a long piece 121IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a board case 121IW201. Thus, the right end of the long piece 121IW500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. Provide to be movable.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 121IW201, so that the setting is made through the through-hole 121IW500Bc formed in the left part of the long piece 121IW500Bb. The key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operable. In other words, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500B (long piece 121IW500Bb) covers the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in the horizontal direction with respect to the board case 121IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500B is slid rightward with respect to the board case 121IW201 to release the state where the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-45 (A) and 20-45 (B), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the board case 121IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the projecting dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the board case 121IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 121IW500B with respect to the board case 121IW201. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 20-46 (A), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 121IW500B has a protruding dimension from the board case 121IW201. By sliding the board case 121IW201 until the length becomes L2 (putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 into an allowable state), a game clerk or the like operates the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052, thereby causing the pachinko game. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-46 (B), the security cover 121IW500B is moved to the board case 121IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 121IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if it is not slid (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to a restricted state), the security cover 121IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 121IW003. It has become.

  For this reason, in the present first modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, so the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500B is set. Forgetting to cover the changeover switch 121IW052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 121IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

  In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 121IW500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 121IW001a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003, thereby restricting movement in the left-right direction from the covering position. However, the security cover 121IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state in which the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are covered by the security cover 121IW500B is maintained. .

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. A cover position covering the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is rotated from the cover position, with the pivot 121IW500Cd facing the vertical direction provided on the back side of the frame 121IW003 as the center. You may be pivotally supported between the covering release positions. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 121IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 121IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 121IW001a, and the long piece 121IW500Cb is switched to the setting key 121IW051. What is necessary is just to make it control the rotation to the back side from the state which has covered switch 121IW052 from the back side.

  When the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are set by rotating the security cover 121IW500C around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 121IW201. What is necessary is just to cancel | release the state which coat | covered and to enable operation. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 121IW500C (long piece 121IW500Cb) covering the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500C is rotated around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 121IW201, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are set. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to an allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-48 (A), the security cover 121IW500C according to the second modification is rotated around the pivot 121IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating a setting key 121IW051 or a setting changeover switch 121IW052 by a store clerk or the like. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-48 (B), the security cover 121IW500C is rotated in a clockwise direction in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 121IW500C. If the 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are not covered (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 121IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a, and the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. It is impossible.

  For this reason, in the second modification example, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, so the setting key 121IW051 by the security cover 121IW500C is set. Forgetting to cover the changeover switch 121IW052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 121IW003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit can be prevented, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the feature part 121IW, the form in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 121IW003a. When the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 121IW003a in this way, the modification 3 is shown in FIGS. 20-49 (A) to 20-49 (C). As described above, the through-hole 121IW003b is formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 121IW003, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 can be operated through the through-hole 121IW003b. In this case, a mounting surface such as an IC on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are on the opposite side of the main board 11 from the mounting surface. Placed on the surface.

  As described above, when the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 can be operated through the through-hole 121IW003b, the door body 121IW003c that can open and close the through-hole 121IW003b is provided, and the door body 121IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be restricted. 20-49 (B) and 20-49 (C), when the door body 121IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 121IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 121IW003a. Since 121IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 121IW003a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification 4)
In this feature 121IW, the stage was changed after the end of the small hit game, and the setting value was suggested by switching to the background image corresponding to the changed stage. You may comprise so that a setting value may be suggested by switching a pattern table and performing a series of setting value suggestion effects over several fluctuation displays. Hereinafter, modification 4 for switching the variation pattern table after the end of the small hit game will be described.

  In the modified example 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ends the small hit game, specifically, in the small hit end process (step S120) in the special symbol process, Assume that a small hit after flag indicating that the small hit game is over is set.

  FIG. 20-50 is a flowchart illustrating the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the fourth modification. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the after-hit flag is set (step 121IWS1101). If the after-hit flag is not set (i.e., not after the end of the small-hit game), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as to whether it is a big hit, a small hit, A variation pattern determination table corresponding to the type and the small hit type is selected (step 121IWS1102). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

  If the after-hit flag is set (that is, after the end of the small-hit game), the CPU 103 sets the value of the after-hit counter to count the number of fluctuations after the end of the small-hit game. Add (step 121IWS1103). Further, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table for small hits as a table for determining the variation pattern (step 121IWS1104).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the counter number of times after small hitting is a predetermined value (for example, 3) (step 121IWS1105). If the value of the counter number of times after small hit is not a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107. If the value of the after-hit counter is a predetermined value, the CPU 103 resets the after-hit flag and also resets (clears to 0) the after-hit counter (step 121IWS1106). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the variation pattern determination table selected in steps 121IWS1102 and 1104, and determines a variation pattern (step 121IWS1107).

  In the modified example 4, the processing of steps 121IWS1103 to S1107 is executed, so that after the small hit game is finished, the fluctuation display for a predetermined value is completed (for example, three fluctuation displays), and only after the small hit Variation pattern is determined. In this example, it is assumed that a fixed variation pattern is determined with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern dedicated to small hits.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, even if the fluctuation display for a predetermined value after the end of the small hit game is finished, if the big hit or the small hit is reached, You may comprise so that the variation pattern for winning may be determined.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS1108).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS1109). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step 121IWS1110).

  20-51 is a flowchart illustrating variable display start setting processing (step S171) in the fourth modification. In the fourth modification, the processing in steps 121IWS601 to S602 is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. When the decorative design stop symbol is determined in step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601 is a variation pattern dedicated to after small hit (step 121). 121IWS631). In the case of the variation pattern dedicated to after the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect count counter for counting the number of effects of the suggested effect after the small hit indicating the set value after the end of the small hit game to 1 Add (step 121IWS632).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the effect counter after the addition is 1 (step 121IWS633). If the value of the performance counter is not 1 (that is, if the second and subsequent fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished), the process proceeds to step 121IWS636. If the value of the performance counter is 1 (that is, if the first variation display after the small hit game is finished), the production control CPU 120 determines the type of the suggested effect after the small hit. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the after-hit suggestion effect determination table to determine the type of the after-hit suggestion effect (step 121IWS634). Then, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determined type of after-hit suggestion effect in the storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 121IWS635).

  20-52 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a post-hit suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 20-52, in this example, there are three types of after-hit suggestion effects 1 to 3 as types of after-hit suggestion effects. In this example, the suggestion effect after small hits varies between the first time, the second time, and the third time over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, in a total of 90 seconds of three fluctuation displays fixed after 30 seconds). It is configured as a series of effects executed in such a manner that the story develops in order as the display is executed. Among these, after the small hit suggestion effect 1, a series of effects are executed and an effect suggesting that the set value is finally “1” (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of variations, and the last third variation is performed. A character reminiscent of the set value “1” in a battle victory). The after-hit suggestion effect 2 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects is executed and finally is a set value “2” (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of variations, and is set at the last third variation. The character reminiscent of the value “2” wins in battle). The after-hit suggestion effect 3 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects is executed and finally is a set value “3” (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of variations, and is set at the last third variation. The character reminiscent of the value “3” wins the battle).

  As shown in FIG. 20-52, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of selecting the after-hit suggestion effect 1 is high, and when the set value is “2”, the after-hit When the suggestion effect 2 is selected at a high rate and the setting value is “3”, the proportion at which the small hit suggestion effect 3 is selected is high.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the type of the determined after-hit suggestion effect (step 121IWS636). In this case, in the case of the first variation display after the end of the small hit game (in the case of Y in step 121IWS633), it is determined in step 121IWS634 and is determined in step 121IWS635 according to the type after the small hit suggestion effect stored in the RAM122. Select the process table. In addition, in the case of the second variation display after the end of the small hit game (in the case of N in step 121IWS 633), the type of post-small hit suggestion effect determined in the first variation display after the end of the small hit game is Since the bag is stored in the RAM 122, a process table corresponding to the type is selected for the after-hit suggestion effect stored in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS617. Note that the processing after step 121 IWS 617 is the same as those shown in FIGS.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern is not dedicated to the small hit (N in Step 121IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 resets (clears to 0) the effect number counter (Step 121IWS637). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS603. Note that the processing after step 121 IWS 603 is the same as those shown in FIGS.

  In this example, after the end of the small hit game, a variation display fixed for 30 seconds is performed over three variations, and a series of post-small hit suggestion effects are executed for a total of 90 seconds. The number of fluctuations and the period to be executed are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, after the end of the small hit game, a variation display that is fixed for 20 seconds over four variations may be performed, and a series of post-small hit suggestion effects may be executed for a total of 80 seconds.

As described above, the feature 121IW includes the first invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state;
Based on being controlled to the special state, a specific effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS1008 to S1011 in the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing the effect stage); With
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at a different execution ratio according to the set value that is set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting at step 121IWS1009 as shown in FIG. 20-38). (Determining whether or not to change the production stage at a different rate depending on the value)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, the control to the special state by the specific effect is performed. It is possible to increase the production effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The special state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, a small hit gaming state based on the small hit types A to C),
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the setting value “1” is suggested by changing to the effect stage A). The setting value “2” is suggested by changing to the production stage B, and the setting value “3” is suggested by changing to the production stage C).
Depending on the type of the controlled special state, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value by the execution of the specific effect varies (for example, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C as shown in FIG. 20-38) The suggestion of the set value by the stage changed later has the highest reliability, and the suggestion of the set value by the stage changed after the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The specific performance execution means is
There are cases where a specific effect is executed and a case where the effect stage is not executed depending on the mode of transitioning the effect state after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. Is)
Depending on the set value, the ratio of executing the specific effect varies depending on the mode of transitioning the effect state after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the set value “1” Depending on which of “3”, there is a change in the stage determined to have no stage change or change (change to stage A, change to stage B, change to stage C))
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
Depending on the set value that has been set, the specific effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transitioning to the specific effect state among a plurality of types of effect states after the special state is finished (for example, FIG. (As shown in 20-38, the stage may be changed to the production stage C only when the set value is "3")
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
Variable display pattern determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that determines a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variation pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern). Steps 121IWS1101 to S1107 in FIG.
Variable display execution means for executing variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the CPU 120 for effect control),
The variable display pattern determination means determines the variable display pattern by switching the variable display pattern determination data after finishing the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the step 121IWS1101 is Y and the steps 121IWS1103 to S1107). Run)
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps 121IWS632 to S636 when Y is determined in step 121IWS631). Run)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps 121IWS509-S515, S704-S709, S901-S906 in the CPU 120)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

In addition, the feature 121IW includes the following second invention. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a small hit), specific effect execution means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing the effect stage) over a plurality of variable displays. Step 121 IWS1008-S1011)
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at a different execution ratio according to the set value that is set (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting at step 121IWS1009 as shown in FIG. 20-38). (Determining whether or not to change the production stage at a different rate depending on the value)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, the specific effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays. Can be performed, so the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hit types A to C) different from the advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the setting value “1” is suggested by changing to the effect stage A). The setting value “2” is suggested by changing to the production stage B, and the setting value “3” is suggested by changing to the production stage C).
Depending on the type of the controlled special state, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value by the execution of the specific effect varies (for example, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C as shown in FIG. 20-38) The suggestion of the set value by the stage changed later has the highest reliability, and the suggestion of the set value by the stage changed after the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state,
The specific performance execution means is
There are cases where the specific effect is executed and the case where the effect stage is not executed depending on the mode of changing the effect state after the special state is finished (for example, when the effect stage is changed or not changed as shown in FIG. 20-38). And)
Depending on the set value, the ratio of executing the specific effect varies depending on the mode of transitioning the effect state after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the set value “1” Depending on which of “3”, there is a change in the stage determined to have no stage change or change (change to stage A, change to stage B, change to stage C))
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Depending on the set value that has been set, the specific effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transitioning to the specific effect state among a plurality of types of effect states after the special state is finished (for example, FIG. (As shown in 20-38, the stage may be changed to the production stage C only when the set value is "3")
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state,
Variable display pattern determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that determines a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variation pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern). Steps 121IWS1101 to S1107 in FIG.
Variable display execution means for executing variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion for executing steps 171 to 173 in the CPU 120 for effect control),
The variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern by switching the variable display pattern determination data after finishing the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the step 121IWS1101 is Y in step 121IWS1103). Execute S1107),
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs steps 121IWS632 to S636 when Y is determined in step 121IWS631). Run)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps 121IWS509-S515, S704-S709, S901-S906 in the CPU 120)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

Further, the feature 121IW includes the third invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of performing the production,
The production execution means
A specific effect (for example, a look-ahead zone effect) can be executed over a predetermined period,
An effect can be executed such that a set value is suggested when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, occurrence of a big hit) during execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-28, a pre-read zone effect) If a big hit occurs during the execution of the prefetch zone effect according to the pattern 1, it is suggested that the setting value is “1”. If a big hit occurs during the execution of the prefetch zone effect according to the prefetch zone effect pattern 2, the setting value “2” is suggested. And if a big hit occurs during the execution of the prefetch zone production by the prefetch zone production pattern 3, it is suggested that the setting value is “3”)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The effect execution means can execute the effect so that the suggested setting value varies depending on at which timing during execution of the specific effect the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-28). In addition, when the setting value “1” is suggested by the second change look-ahead zone effect and a big hit, the accuracy of the setting value “1” is high, and the setting value “2” is set by the third change look-ahead zone effect. Is set to “2”, the accuracy of the setting value “2” is high, and the setting value “3” is suggested in the pre-read zone effect of the fourth variation and the setting value “3” is reached. Is highly accurate)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
A determination means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a part for executing step 121IWS110 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Determination means (for example, a part for executing step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before determination by the determination means;
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs prefetching based on a symbol designation command in the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 20-20. (Determine execution of zone production)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) Steps 121IWS509-S515, S704-S709, S901-S906 in the CPU 120)
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

The feature 121IW includes the following fourth invention. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and a process of displaying character images of giraffe, elephant, and lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, etc., but it may be regular (when there is a total fluctuation, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.) or irregularly (such as when winning a random lottery) It is described that it may be. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect in the gaming machine configured to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set. . Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's motion;
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, execute steps 121IWS603 to S605 in the CPU 120 for effect control and execute the suggestion effect during reach in step 121IWS616) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the suggestion effect during reach) that suggests the set value. The process table is selected and a step 121IWS618 and S805 are executed).
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the suggested setting value in response to the player's motion being detected a plurality of times by the motion detection means (for example, for effect control) CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS806-S817)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
Reach effect execution means capable of executing reach effect (for example, super reach) (for example, a part for selecting a process table corresponding to super reach in step 121IWS 616 in the effect control CPU 120 and executing steps 121IWS 618 and S805),
The effect can be executed so that the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, according to the operation of the push button 31B as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (F)). Panel images are deleted one by one)
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the setting value indicated at the timing when the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, FIG. 20-43 (C) to FIG. 20-). As shown in FIG. 44 (F), the panel images on which the icon images 121IW119 to 120 indicating the set values are displayed are deleted one by one)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means may or may not execute the suggestion effect when executing the effect so that the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, FIG. 20-26 and FIG. 20-). As shown in FIG. 27, there are cases where icon patterns 2 to 9 in which icon images are displayed are selected and icon pattern 1 in which icon images are not displayed are selected.
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The reliability of the reach effect varies depending on the combination of the set value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect (for example, when the set value is “1” as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A)). When icon pattern 2 is selected, it is confirmed that it is a big hit)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect, the reliability of the setting value suggested by the suggestion effect varies (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 200-27, a super When the icon image by the icon pattern 9 is displayed in the reach, the expectation for the setting value “3” is high)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepared,
Suggestion execution means
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120) 121IWS509-S515, S704-S709, S901-S906)
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the suggestion effect in the game, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. can do.

The feature 121IW includes the fifth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
If the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. For example, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS512, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. The suggestion effect determination means to determine (for example, the part which performs step 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in CPU120 for effect control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 122). The steps 121IWS510, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set value).
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using determination data corresponding to a predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). (Steps 121IWS512, S707, and S904 are executed based on the set value “1”)
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  In the feature 121IW, “determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect” includes determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also including determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. It is possible to confirm the suggestion effect executed in the past, and to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set setting value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fifth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can restrict an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is allowed. 48)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the feature 121IW includes the sixth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means restricts execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs N in step 121IWS513 and N, S708). N, when N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. It is possible to confirm the suggestion effect executed in the past, and to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set setting value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can restrict an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is allowed. 48)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

The feature 121IW also includes the seventh invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and setting before and after change obtained by the change stop command. Based on the value, it is described that display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant and lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value specifying command) is not normal. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation. 121IWS029), and
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set; ,
On the basis of the set value information output from the information output means, suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect) The CPU 120 includes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, a big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Pre-implying effects, suggesting effects during games, and suggesting effects during big hits)
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect without executing the first suggestion effect as the suggestion effect (for example, The effect control CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906 so as not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode)
According to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is a first suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestion effect, or a big hit by the fourth effect mode as the suggestion effect). The suggestion effect) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect) according to the first effect mode can be executed. It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table, a game suggestion effect determination table, a big hit suggestion effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect. The suggestion effect determination means to determine (for example, the part which performs step 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in CPU120 for effect control),
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 122). The steps 121IWS510, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set value).
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the suggestion effect determination table during game, the big hit suggestion effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table, step 121IWS514. , S709 and S906 are executed)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed at different ratios depending on the set value (for example, the suggestion effect before game or It is described that it may be possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time zone. Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from when the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that it is possible to further include notifying means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. It is possible to confirm the suggestion effect executed in the past, and to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
Restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the seventh invention,
The setting suggestion execution means can execute the setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set setting value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) It is described that it may be further provided with an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which are difficult to make. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the seventh invention,
An opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can restrict an operation on the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the restriction member maintains the restriction state in which the operation on the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the restriction state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In the state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is allowed. 48)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

  In addition, in this feature part 121IW, it is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when controlled to effect mode A, when set value information is not normally input, If the suggestion effect is configured to be executed as being set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the configuration of the fifth aspect described above) and is controlled in the effect mode B, the set value When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestive effect (the configuration of the sixth invention described above). When the information is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (configuration of the seventh invention described above). I can't catch it. For example, according to the gaming state, the control method according to any of the fifth to seventh inventions described above may be used to switch the suggestion effect. In this case, for example, if the gaming state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as being set to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player. If the game state is a short time state, and the setting value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestion effect is limited (the above-described sixth invention). If the game state is a probable change state, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect when the set value information is not normally input ( (Configuration of the seventh invention described above))

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above, and the suggestion effect can be configured to be executed using only one of the control methods. Also good.

  Also, in the case of the feature part 121IW, if the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as missing or garbled data, the execution of the suggested effect is controlled by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions (suggestion Although the case where the production is limited) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be limited. In this case, for example, every time a set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new set value command is received, When the set value indicated by the received set value command does not match the previously stored set value, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggested effect is performed by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions described above. You may make it control (a suggestion effect is restrict | limited).

  Further, the way of making the game different in each of the set values “1” to “3” is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered set value such as the set value “1” or “3”, a long game occurs when a long game is likely to occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even number setting value such as setting value “2”, it is configured so that the likelihood of the extended resort is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect that suggests an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, if the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions. It may be configured so as to restrict the suggestion effect.

  In addition, the method for controlling the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fifth to seventh inventions has not been normally received is a prefetch zone effect as a suggestion effect, a suggestion effect during reach, an effect stage. It is also possible to apply to the production by the change.

The feature 121IW also includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means at least in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) depending on the set value that has been set A game machine characterized in that it can execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, Can be motivated to perform the game, and can enhance the fun of gaming.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols),
The suggestion effect execution means displays a suggestion effect (for example, different identification information for effect depending on the set value set) in a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed (for example, It is described that the display of an odd number of initial appearances) may be executable, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). (As shown in -23 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value that has been set after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have higher reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature 121IW includes the ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be given effectively, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times) after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B)).
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a motivation for playing a game during a predetermined period, and to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIG. 20-6 (A), ( B))
It is described that the variable display execution means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of the plurality of variable display patterns at a different ratio between when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value. (For example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is established within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of executions of reach effects or pseudo-continuous effects has reached a predetermined number of times, a specific super reach effect) (For example, when a big hit is generated within a specific period, the big hit suggestion can be executed) (FIG. 20-34). (See A) and (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature section 121IW includes the tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.)
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with notifying means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestion effect. The suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times that the suggestion effect has been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the suggested effect that has been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify information related to the suggested suggestion that has been executed while waiting for a customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect;
Image generating means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by the imaging device;
It is described that the specific image may be provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a form that can be captured by the imaging device. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature 121IW also includes the following eleventh invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be recognized by another effect, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, an effect effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc .;
When the suggestion effect is executed, it further includes a restricting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). (See (D))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
The restricting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timing overlaps between the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, either one is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending) Change to run during the period)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restricting unit prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited. See FIG. 20-34 (D). )
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the restricting unit executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 121IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, suggesting during a big hit) Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image by the production))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect in preference to the display related to the predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Can do.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the feature part 121IW includes the following twelfth invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest may be lowered by executing a setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set;
Setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value that has been set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute setting suggestion at a different ratio depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B)).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggesting effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestive effect) A gaming machine characterized in that it is further provided with a hard-acting effect rendering, a light guide plate rendering, an error display, and the like is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute a predetermined notification (for example, an effect effect) for operating a movable member (for example, the movable member 121IW101). The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
A light-transmitting light guide plate capable of transmitting light (for example, light guide plate 121IW103);
A light emitter provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notification means can execute a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) for emitting light to the front surface of the gaming machine from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute a predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting is set to the first setting value (for example, a suggestion effect during the big hit of the first effect mode; see FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B)). The second setting suggestion that suggests that the second setting value, which is more advantageous for the player than the first setting value, is set (for example, a big hit suggestion effect in the third effect mode. FIG. 20-34). A) and (B)) can be executed,
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 20-34 (E)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
Setting suggestion setting means capable of setting a setting suggestion execution ratio (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided in the gaming machine (management The user can change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-like or belt-like movable body) on which the identification information is arranged;
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the set value is changed. Decline in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature section 121IW also includes the thirteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a risk that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the big hit game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means rather than the first set value to the magnitude of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that there may be provided suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
Providing production execution means capable of performing production,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) regardless of a set value that is set during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, the joy is too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set values that are set.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The feature section 121IW also includes a fourteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that there is a risk that gambling is likely to be too high at a setting with high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 14th invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value,
The predetermined control period (for example, the variation time) regarding the variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the 14th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the 14th invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, euphoria becomes too high. This can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the 14th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using gaming value,
A game value granting means for granting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means rather than the first set value to the magnitude of the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) in which the proportion occupied is high,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 14th invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period related to the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value that has been set, and according to such a configuration, gambling is too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 14th invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the 14th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). Game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12),
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion on the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the connection ratio, role ratio, and base).
It is described that it may be configured, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Note that the configuration indicated by the characteristic portion 121IW can be combined with a configuration indicated by another characteristic portion such as the characteristic portion 31AK as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine. For example, in the case of executing the pre-read zone effect, the reach suggestion effect during the reach, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect shown in the feature section 121IW, Medium suggestion production, production by change of production stage, pre-game suggestion production, game suggestion production, big hit suggestion production, when a predetermined period has elapsed, pre-read zone production and reach suggestion in the same manner as the feature 31AK You may be configured to be able to notify the title corresponding to the effect, the effect by changing the effect stage, the suggestion effect before the game, the suggestion effect during the game, and the suggestion effect during the big hit.

(Explanation regarding feature 136IW)
Next, the feature part 136IW will be described. FIG. 21A is a block diagram illustrating an example of a magnetic detector, a setting board, and a main board. As shown in FIG. 21A, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are connected to the main board 11 via the setting board 136IW300. The first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are sensors for detecting an unauthorized operation using a magnet outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and control the game when detecting an external magnetic field due to the unauthorized operation. An error signal is output to the microcomputer 100 for use. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives an error signal, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a communication unit that can communicate with the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the hall management computer to An abnormality notification process for notifying that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine 1 is executed.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the error signal from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 corresponds to magnetic field detection (magnet detection) in the main-side error processing in step S22 (for example, Check if it is set to high level. Hereinafter, an error signal corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection) is referred to as an error signal being output, and an error signal corresponds to magnetic field non-detection (magnet non-detection) (for example, The error signal is not output.

  When an error signal is output, an abnormality notification process for notifying that an abnormality has been detected is executed. In this feature 136IW, as abnormality notification processing, the game control microcomputer 100 displays, for example, an image indicating “magnet discovery” or an image indicating abnormality detection on the image display device 5 on the effect control board 12. Take control. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 causes the effect control board 12 to output sound number data corresponding to the abnormality notification sound to the voice control board 130 and output the abnormality notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, in the information output process of step S23, the game control microcomputer 100 performs a process of transmitting information including identification information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an abnormality is detected to the hall management computer via the communication unit. Do.

  If a magnet that may be used for cheating such as illegally guiding a game ball to the winning area or a magnet used for cheating is discovered by the abnormality notification process as described above, In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a state indicating an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5, and an abnormality notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A report is also sent to the hall management computer.

  As an abnormality notification process executed when an error signal is output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101, abnormality notification is performed using only the image display device 5, or the speaker 8L, It is possible to appropriately adopt a form such as performing abnormality notification using only 8R. In addition, abnormality notification is performed using other effect devices (for example, light emitters such as LEDs), the image display device 5 and speakers 8L and 8R, and other effect devices (for example, light emitters such as LEDs) May be used in combination.

  Further, in this feature 136IW, the abnormality notification process is executed by the game control microcomputer 100. However, the abnormality notification process has a configuration other than the game control microcomputer 100, such as the production control microcomputer 100. It is good also as performing using.

  In this feature 136IW, when an error signal is output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101, the abnormality notification process is continued until a predetermined release operation is performed by an administrator such as hall staff. Executed. In addition to this, the abnormality notification process is continuously executed until the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, or when an error signal is not output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101. (When the error signal is in a state corresponding to magnetic field non-detection (magnet non-detection)), it is possible to adopt various continuation forms such as terminating the abnormality notification.

  In the feature 136IW, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are set to supply power to the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 and to set the effective detection direction. A setting board 136IW300 is connected. The feature 136IW is configured to provide two magnetic detectors, but may be configured to provide one magnetic detector, or may be configured to provide three or more magnetic detectors. Also good.

  The first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 of the feature 136IW have two surfaces (first mounting surface S1, second mounting surface S2) among six surfaces formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape. 1 can be used as a mounting surface. Selection of the mounting surface (selection of mounting mode) is selected according to the situation of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different for each model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this feature 136IW, when one of the two mounting surfaces is selected, the mounting area for the pachinko gaming machine 1 (corresponding to the area of the mounting surface), the amount of protrusion of the magnetic detector on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since the lead-out direction of the cable led out from the cable lead-out hole of the magnetic detector is different, the situation on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be dealt with. Here, a coordinate system is defined for the magnetic detector. The x axis, the y axis, and the z axis that are orthogonal to each other are defined so that the first mounting surface S1 is parallel to the xy plane and the second mounting surface S2 is parallel to the zx plane.

  The first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 of the feature 136IW can detect the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis orthogonal to each other as the magnetic detection directions. Specifically, the x-axis sensor mounted on the magnetic detector detects the magnetism in the x-axis direction, the y-axis sensor detects the magnetism in the y-axis direction, and the z-axis sensor detects the magnetism in the z-axis direction. To detect. The magnetic detector of this feature 136IW can set two axes as effective detection directions among the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis. In other words, any one of the xy plane and the zx plane can be set as an effective plane for detecting magnetism. The setting of the effective plane in the feature 136IW is realized by the circuit configuration (hardware specifications) of the setting board 136IW300. In addition, the setting of the effective plane is performed by a mechanical switch provided on the setting board 136IW300 or the magnetic detector. It is possible to adopt various forms such as performing by switching (hardware specifications), or performing program processing (software specifications) such as the game control microcomputer 100 or the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 21B is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the first magnetic detector 136IW100 together with the setting board 136IW300 and the main board 11. FIG. 21-2 shows only the configuration of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, but the configuration of the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is the same as that of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, and is not shown. ing. Hereinafter, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are collectively referred to simply as a magnetic detector.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the feature 136IW, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 includes a magnetic detection element 136IW110 and a control circuit 136IW120. The control circuit 136IW120 includes an AD converter 136IW121 and a control unit 136IW122. The AD converter 136IW121 converts a detection voltage, which is an analog signal output from the magnetic detection element 136IW110, into a digital signal. In addition, the control circuit 136IW120 can execute an average process, a reference value setting process, an effective surface setting process, and a comparison process. Note that a microcontroller that performs a control operation in accordance with a program can be used as the control circuit 136IW120. When a microcontroller is used as the control circuit 136IW120, each process described above is realized by a program.

  The magnetic detection element 136IW110 detects a change in impedance due to a magnetic field applied from the outside to the amorphous wire arranged along three axes (x axis, y axis, z axis) orthogonal to each other, and based on each change amount. The control circuit 136IW120 is configured to output a detection voltage, and has a function of outputting a channel signal to the magnetic detection element 136IW110. Which detection element outputs the detection voltage from the x-axis detection element (x-axis sensor), the y-axis detection element (y-axis sensor), and the z-axis detection element (z-axis sensor) as the channel signal? Is a signal for selecting.

  The averaging process is a process of averaging the detection voltage value output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 over time. The reference value setting process is a process of setting a reference value for detecting the synthetic magnetic field change amount based on the detection voltage output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100. The effective surface setting process is a process of setting an effective plane having two axes in the effective detection direction among the three axes of magnetic detection directions output by the magnetic detection element 136IW110. In this feature 136IW, one of the two planes parallel to the xy plane and the zx plane is set as an effective plane according to the mounting mode of the magnetic detector. The comparison process is a process of outputting an error signal to the game control microcomputer 100 when the amount of change in the combined magnetic field on the effective plane exceeds a threshold for fraud detection using a magnet.

  As shown in FIG. 21-2, in the feature 136IW, the setting board 136IW300 receives the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (the gaming control microcomputer 100) from the power source of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power supply voltage is supplied to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) based on the supplied power supply voltage, and each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136). A function of outputting a selection signal Sa for selecting an effective detection direction corresponding to the detector 136IW101) is provided. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the setting board 136IW300 does not receive the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). Is not supplied with the power supply voltage, and the selection signal Sa is not output.

  The setting board 136IW300 is supplied to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) based on the input of the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). It has a transistor that switches the supply of power supply voltage from an off state to an on state. In addition, the setting board 136IW300 supplies the power supply voltage to each magnetic detector (the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detection) based on the input of the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). Circuit 136IW101) is converted into a selection signal Sa corresponding to the setting and output. Although the main board 11 has restrictions on the capacities of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102, in this feature 136IW, various settings of each magnetic detector (the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101) are set on the setting board 136IW300. It is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  The feature 136IW is configured to supply power to a plurality of magnetic detectors based on the input of one magnetic detector CLRT signal. The processing burden on the control microcomputer 100 or the like can be reduced. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration example indicated by 136IW, and in order to individually control the power supply of a plurality of magnetic detectors, a plurality of transistors capable of switching the supply of power supply voltage between an on state and an off state are provided. It may be. In this case, the configuration may be such that the magnetic detector CLRT signal is individually input to each transistor, or when one magnetic detector CLRT signal is input, the supply of the power supply voltage to the corresponding magnetic detector is turned off by each transistor. It is good also as a structure switched from a state to an ON state.

  In this feature 136IW, when the supply of the power supply voltage to each magnetic detector (the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101) is switched from the off state to the on state, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. The on state continues until it is stopped. For example, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened after the supply of the power supply voltage to each magnetic detector is turned on, each magnet is temporarily Control may be performed so that the supply of power supply voltage to the detector is switched from the on state to the off state, or control may be performed so that an error signal is not output from each magnetic detector, or an error signal is output. Even if it is done, you may make it perform control which does not perform abnormality alerting | reporting process. Such control can be realized by performing program processing (software specification) such as the game control microcomputer 100 and the effect control microcomputer 100. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate abnormality notification from being performed due to a change in the magnetic field due to the gaming machine frame 3 being opened.

  Further, in this feature 136IW, the magnetic detector CLRT signal is output by the program processing (software specification) of the game control microcomputer 100, and each magnetic detector (the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101) is output. ) Is switched from the off state to the on state, but other configurations may be employed. For example, output signals from the door opening sensor 136IW090 and the setting key 136IW051 (details will be described later) of the feature 136IW are input to the main board 11, but are branched and input to the setting board 136IW300. When the door opening sensor 136IW090 and the setting key 136IW051 are both off, the power supply voltage is supplied to each magnetic detector (the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101) on the setting board 136IW300. It is good also as a circuit structure (hardware specification) made into an ON state. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  In this feature 136IW, the setting board 136IW300 controls the power supply to each magnetic detector, but other components (for example, motors for driving the solenoids 81 and 82, the movable body 32, various switches, etc.) Specifically, it may be configured to control with power supply to a solenoid (34V), a motor (12V, 15V, 18V, 20V), a switch (12V), etc. That is, the setting board 136IW300 that controls power supply need not be dedicated to the magnetic detector. In this feature 136IW, although it is divided by control parts such as a transistor of the setting board 136IW300, the voltage supplied to the magnetic detector may be other parts (for example, solenoids 81 and 82, movable The voltage supplied to a motor for driving the body 32).

  This feature 136IW is configured to control the power supply to the magnetic detector through the path of the main board 11 → the relay board (in this example, the setting board 136IW300) having the function of controlling the power supply → the magnetic detector. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the power supply to the magnetic detector is controlled by the path of the main board 11 → the power board having the function of controlling the power supply → the main board 11 (or the relay board) → the magnetic detector. It is good also as composition to do. Specifically, in the power supply board, after changing from the AC power supply (AC24V) to the DC voltage (DC34V), the power supply for the magnetic detector may be directly created. On the other hand, a control signal may be output. That is, when a control signal is input from the main board 11 to the power supply board, the magnetic detector power generated on the power supply board may be supplied to the magnetic detector. In addition, when controlling the generation of the dedicated voltage from the main board 11 to the power supply board, not only the magnetic detector but also various switches for detecting a game ball and a vibration sensor for detecting the vibration of the gaming machine. The power supply to the solenoid or motor may be controlled. In this case, power is supplied to the target component when it is desired to control the operation in the progress or control of the game.

  FIG. 21C is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the magnetic detector, and FIG. 21D is an explanatory diagram illustrating the function of the input / output unit (input / output terminal) terminal of the magnetic detector. The first magnetic detector 136IW100 of the feature 136IW is a device including a magnetic detection element 136IW110 and a control circuit 136IW120. In the example illustrated in FIG. 21C, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 stabilizes the magnetic detection element 136IW110, the control circuit 136IW120, and the + 12V voltage input from the outside, and supplies the voltage to the magnetic detection element 136IW110 and the control circuit 136IW120. And a buffer circuit 136IW186 that inputs a selection signal Sa (input from SELECT) and outputs it to the control circuit 136IW120, and an output transistor 136IW184 that outputs an error signal.

  In this feature 136IW, there are Hi (for example, power supply voltage 12 [V]) and Low (for example, 0 [V] GND) as selection signals Sa, and Hi (for example, power supply voltage 12 [V]) at the SELECT terminal. When the selection signal Sa is supplied, the same power supply as the power supply for which the power supply to the 12V terminal is controlled is supplied. Such a configuration can prevent the wiring from becoming complicated. Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration example of the feature 136IW, and a dedicated power source may be provided for each. By comprising in that way, the effect which improves the detection accuracy of a magnetic detector, and the effect which suppresses generation | occurrence | production of malfunction can be acquired.

  In this feature 136IW, the variation of sensor characteristics and the influence of geomagnetism are eliminated by the software of the microcontroller that implements the control circuit 136IW120. Specifically, when power supply to the magnetic detector is started, a detection voltage is input from the magnetic detection element 136IW110, and a reference value is set based on the input detection voltage. Then, the amount of change from the reference value of the detection voltage from the magnetic detector (the amount of change in the combined magnetic field) is calculated for the effective plane, and if the amount of change exceeds the threshold, there is a magnet in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Determine and output an error signal. It should be noted that by appropriately correcting the set reference value, it may be possible to cope with a change in environment due to magnetization of the electromagnetic component.

  FIG. 21-5 is a block diagram illustrating a control configuration example of the control unit 136IW122. The control circuit 136IW120 of the feature unit 136IW includes a magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x, 202y, 202z corresponding to the x axis, the y axis, and the z axis, a combined vector calculation unit 136IW233, and a magnetic field detection unit 136IW234. ing. The magnetic field change amount calculation units 136IW202x, 202y, and 202z execute a monitoring process for monitoring the magnetic field change amount (change in the surrounding magnetic field) in each axial direction based on the output of the magnetic detection element 136IW110. The combined vector calculation unit 136IW233 calculates a combined magnetic field change amount in a plane constituted by two axes based on the magnetic field change amount in each axis direction. The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 compares the composite magnetic field change amount in a certain plane (the plane set by the selection signal Sa) with a threshold value, and performs a detection process of outputting an error signal indicating an illegal magnetic field change when the threshold value is exceeded. Run. In the feature unit 136IW, the monitoring process and the detection process are thus executed by the control unit 136IW122 in the magnetic detector. Instead of such a form, any one of the monitoring process and the detection process may be performed by other than the magnetic detector. When performed by other than the magnetic detector, it may be executed by the game control microcomputer 100 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control microcomputer 100, or the like.

  Magnetic field change amount calculation units 136IW202x, 202y, and 202z calculate reference values for the detected voltage values of the x-axis sensor, the y-axis sensor, and the z-axis sensor, respectively, and present detected voltage values (averaged detected voltage values) A magnetic field change amount that is a difference between the reference value and the reference value is calculated for each axis. FIG. 21-5 illustrates a configuration example of the magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x for the x axis, but the magnetic field change amount calculation units 136IW202y and 202z for the y axis and the z axis indicate This is the same as the configuration example.

  The control unit 136IW122 sequentially selects data output from the x-axis sensor, the y-axis sensor, and the z-axis sensor and converted into a digital signal by the AD converter 136IW121 in a cycle of 2 ms. That is, x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis data is input to the control unit 136IW122 every 2 ms. The data of each axis is input to the corresponding magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x to 202z, and the magnetic field change amount is calculated for each axis.

  The data input to the magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x is stored in the register 136IW251, and is sequentially shifted to the next-stage registers 136IW252 to 258 every 2 ms. The data stored in the final stage register 258 is discarded every time new data is shifted. The first averaging unit 136IW203 averages the data stored in the registers 136IW251 to 258, thereby averaging the data output from the x-axis sensor over time. In this feature 136IW, the detection of instantaneous magnetic field changes is eliminated by averaging the data in this way.

  The reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 shown in FIG. 21-5 calculates a reference value when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of power supply to the magnetic detector. Specifically, the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 sequentially shifts and stores the data output from the first averaging unit 136IW203 to registers 136IW261 to 268 (not shown) of the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204. Since the first averaging unit 136IW203 outputs data every 2 ms, the data is stored in all the registers 136IW261 to 268 after 14 ms. A second averaging unit 136IW273 (not shown) of the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 averages the data stored in the registers 136IW261-268 and outputs it as a reference value.

  The subtraction unit 136IW205 shown in FIG. 21-5 subtracts the reference value output from the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 from the current value output from the first averaging unit 136IW203, and takes the absolute value to obtain the magnetic field for each axis. Calculated as the amount of change. The calculated magnetic field change amount for each axis is output to the combined vector calculation unit 136IW233. Therefore, the magnetic field change amount (the absolute value of the magnetic field change with respect to the reference value) is input to the combined vector calculation unit 136IW233. The control unit 136IW122 executes the same processing as the processing for the output of the x-axis sensor for the outputs of the y-axis sensor and the z-axis sensor. Therefore, the magnetic field change amount related to the three axes (x axis, y axis, z axis) is input to the combined vector calculation unit 136IW233.

  The combined vector calculation unit 136IW233 calculates a combined magnetic field change amount for a set of the x-axis and y-axis, the y-axis and z-axis, and the z-axis and x-axis from the three input magnetic field change values. For example, the combined magnetic field change amount of the x-axis and y-axis pair is calculated as the square root of the sum of the square of the x-axis magnetic field change amount and the square of the y-axis magnetic field change amount. That is, it is the amount of change in the combined magnetic field on the xy plane. Similar calculations are performed for the other two sets (y-axis and z-axis, z-axis and x-axis), thereby calculating the combined magnetic field change amount in the yz plane and the zx plane, respectively. The calculated combined magnetic field change amount for each plane (xy plane, yz plane, zx plane) is output to the magnetic field detection unit 136IW234.

  The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 detects the presence / absence of an illegal magnetic field generated by an illegal operation using a magnet from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the side of the glass door frame 2). When an illegal magnetic field is detected, the magnetic field detector 136IW234 outputs an error signal to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. In the feature portion 136IW, the effective surface setting function is realized by the magnetic field detection portion 136IW234. The effective surface setting function is a function for setting an effective plane having two axes in the effective detection direction in the three-axis magnetic detection direction output from the magnetic detection element 136IW110. In this feature 136IW, one of the two surfaces in the xy plane and the zx plane is set as an effective plane according to the mounting mode of the magnetic detector.

  With the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, application of power supply voltage to the setting board 136IW300 is started, and the magnetic detector CLRT signal is output from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Then, the setting board 136IW300 supplies a power supply voltage to the terminal (12V) of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, and a predetermined selection signal Sa generated based on the power supply voltage is supplied to the terminal of the first magnetic detector 136IW100. (SELECT). Based on the selection signal Sa, the control circuit 136IW120 of the first magnetic detector 136IW100 sets an effective plane having two effective detection directions. The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 uses one combined magnetic field change amount corresponding to the effective plane among the three combined magnetic field change amounts output from the combined vector calculation unit 136IW233 for determination.

  In the feature 136IW, the control circuit 136IW120 sets an effective plane having two-axis effective detection directions according to the input selection signal Sa. When the selection signal Sa indicates Hi (for example, power supply voltage), the x axis and the y axis of the magnetic detector are set as effective detection directions (the xy plane is an effective plane), and the z axis direction is set as an invalid axis. When the selection signal Sa indicates Low (for example, 0 [V] GND), the z axis and the x axis of the magnetic detector are set as effective detection directions (the zx plane is an effective plane), and the y axis direction is set as an invalid axis. To do.

  As described above, in the feature 136IW, the effective plane having the two-axis effective detection direction is set by the selection signal Sa generated based on the power supply to the setting board 136IW300. The effective plane may be set not only in the form using the setting board 136IW300 as in the feature 136IW but also in the form in which the magnetic detector is controlled by the main board 11 or the effect control board 12.

  The magnetic field detector 136IW234 compares the composite magnetic field change amount corresponding to the effective plane selected based on the selection signal Sa with a threshold value, and if the composite magnetic field change amount exceeds the threshold value, the game control microcomputer 100 A comparison function for outputting an error signal.

(Change and confirmation of set value in feature 136IW)
Next, the change and confirmation of the set value in the feature part 136IW will be described. In the characteristic portion 136IW, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 functions as a setting key 136IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting switch for changing setting values such as a jackpot winning probability (race rate) in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 136IW052 is provided.

  The setting change main unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 136IW051 and the setting changeover switch 136IW052, is housed in the board case together with the main board 11, and the setting key 136IW051 and the setting changeover switch 136IW052 are The substrate case is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side of the substrate case so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case.

  Since the board case having the setting key 136IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is impossible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 136IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like of the game hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. The setting key 136IW051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation. In this feature part 136IW, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as separate keys, but may be shared by one key.

(Game control main process in the feature 136IW)
FIGS. 21-6 and 21-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the feature 136IW. In this feature 136IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 performs control to turn off the output of the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting substrate 136IW300 (that is, do not output the magnetic detector CTRL signal) (step S136IWS002a).

  By executing the process of step S136IWS002a, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the feature unit 136IW does not immediately output the magnetic detector CTRL signal for the setting board 136IW300. That is, even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, power supply to the magnetic detector is immediately started, and the reference value is not set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets an effect control means activation waiting timer for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when power supply to the gaming machine is started. (Step 136IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer (step 136IWS004), and checks whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 136IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 136IWS004, and the processes of steps 136IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 136IWS006.

  Next, the CPU 103, for example, clears a factory default setting flag indicating that the factory default setting is stored in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). In step 136IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that the setting value remains unchanged from the factory is set, and the value of the setting value is set in step 136IWS006. It may be confirmed whether or not the value at the time of shipment from the factory remains the same. If the factory default setting is maintained (step 136IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 136IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 performs backup to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as step S4. It is determined whether data is stored (step 136IWS007). Specifically, in step 136IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 136IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 136IWS010.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 136IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data by the same process as in step S5 (performed using the error detection code), and the data is normal. (Step 136IWS008). In step 136IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 136IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 136IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 136IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 136IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 136IWS009; No), that is, if power interruption or the like occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the process proceeds to step 136IWS010.

  In step 136IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 136IWS010).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is on (step 136IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 136IW051 is on (step 136IWS012). If the setting key 136IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 136IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 1 process (step 136IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance display such as the link ratio, role ratio, and base is displayed. This information is not cleared but retained. In the RAM clear 1 process, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is off (that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state, N in step 136IWS011), or when the setting key 136IW051 is off (N in step 136IWS012). ) When the output signal from the clear switch is OFF (N in Step 136IWS013), the process proceeds to the loop process without proceeding to Step 136IWS014.

  When the processing of steps 136IWS006 to S014 is executed, in this feature 136IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N of steps 136IWS007 and S008), or when the setting for factory shipment is left (step 136IWS006 Y), if a power interruption occurs during the setting change (step 136IWS009 Y), the setting key 136IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. On the condition that the RAM is cleared, the set value after step 136IWS027 can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the setting key 136IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop process is executed, the setting value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 136IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step 136IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is on (step 136IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 136IW051 is on (step 136IWS017). If setting key 136IW051 is on, CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that setting confirmation processing is to be started to effect control board 12 (step 136IWS018).

  Upon receiving the setting confirmation processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control for notifying that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or predetermined from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the presentation control board 12 may be configured such that when a presentation operation button such as the push button 31B is pressed, “maintenance mode” or the like is displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. “Maintenance mode” refers to, for example, the date / time setting of the real-time clock, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what type of error occurred), the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change This is a mode in which the recording of setting values can be confirmed. When the setting key 136IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are finished, the maintenance mode is also finished.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 136IWS019). In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor. The set value is displayed on the display monitor while the gaming machine frame 3 is open and the setting key 136IW051 is on. If the setting key 136IW051 is not on and the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation processing is terminated.

  When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 136IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034a.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is not on (N in Step 136IWS016) or the setting key 136IW051 is not on (N in Step 136IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 136IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). In addition, CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from power interruption to effect control board 12 by the same processing as in step S7 (step 136IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 2 process (step 136IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as the link ratio, the role ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared but are retained.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is on (step 136IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 136IW051 is on (step 136IWS026). If the setting key 136IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 136IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating the start of the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS028). Upon receiving the setting change processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (step 136IWS029). In the setting change process, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and displays the identified setting value on the display monitor. Next, if the output signal from the setting changeover switch 136IW052 is on, the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor. Further, the set value (set value after update) displayed on the display monitor is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value). If the setting key 136IW051 is not on and the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

  When the setting change process is finished, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 136IWS030). In addition, CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to effect control board 12 (step 136IWS031). In addition, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034a.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is not on (N in Step 136IWS025) or the setting key 136IW051 is not on (N in Step 136IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as Step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S136IWS033). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

  In step S136IW034a, 1 is subtracted from the value of the standby period timer in which a predetermined standby period (for example, 30 seconds) is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the standby period timer after the subtraction is 0. If the value of the standby period timer is not 0, the process of step S136IW034a is repeatedly executed. If the value of the standby period timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

  In step S136IW034b, the CPU 103 performs control to turn on the output of the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 (that is, output the magnetic detector CTRL signal) (step S136IWS034b). Thereafter, the processes of steps IWS035 to S037 are performed. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  This feature 136IW can output a magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (or when the setting confirmation process or setting change process is performed), at least until the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or the setting confirmation process or setting change). Until the processing is completed), the magnetic detector CTRL signal for the setting board 136IW300 is not output. That is, power supply to the magnetic detector is started at least until the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or until the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed), and the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 determines an incorrect magnetic field. No reference value is set for this. With such a configuration, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (or a setting confirmation process or a setting change process is being performed) Setting a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field, that is, setting an inappropriate reference value, can be prevented.

  In addition, when the process of step S136IWS034a is executed, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the feature section 136IW, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (or the setting confirmation process) Alternatively, when the setting change process is performed), after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed), the setting board 136IW300 is used until a predetermined waiting period elapses. The magnetic detector CTRL signal for is not output. That is, after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed), the power supply to the magnetic detector is started until the predetermined waiting period elapses, and the reference magnetic field setting is performed. The reference value for determining the illegal magnetic field is not set in the part 136IW204. With this configuration, the opened gaming machine frame 3 is closed, but even if an operation of opening and closing again is performed because it was in a half-open state or the like, Since a sufficient period is secured as the standby period and the reference value is set after the standby period has elapsed, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate reference value from being set.

  Note that the feature unit 136IW is configured so that the gaming machine frame 3 needs to be opened in order to change or confirm the setting value. However, the setting can be performed without opening the gaming machine frame 3. Even when the value can be changed or confirmed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal for the setting board 136IW300 is not output until a predetermined standby period elapses after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and closed after changing or confirming the set value, a sufficient period is secured as a waiting period until it is closed, and an inappropriate reference value is set. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 21-8 shows a time chart showing the relationship between detection of magnetic change by the magnetic detector and various signals. This time chart shows the state of the x-axis magnetic change detected by the magnetic detector. The magnetic change detected by the magnetic detector also changes for the y-axis and the z-axis, but illustration thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 21-8 (A) shows a time chart showing the relationship between detection of magnetic change by a magnetic detector having a general configuration and various signals, and FIG. 21-8 (B) shows this feature. The time chart which shows the detection of the magnetic change by the magnetic detector by the structure of the part 136IW, and the relationship of various signals is shown.

  Here, the general configuration is a configuration in which, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, power supply to the magnetic detector is started, and a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field is set. Yes, the configuration of this feature 136IW is that when a setting check process or a setting change process is performed when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (or the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) In the case), after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed (or after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed), a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field is not set until a predetermined waiting period elapses. It is a configuration.

  In the example of the general configuration shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), the power supply to the magnetic detector is started at the time (t1) when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and the selection signal Sa is input. In the magnetic detector, a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field is set. At this time, if the gaming machine frame 3 is opened for changing or confirming the setting value, canceling the error, resuming the game, etc., the gaming machine frame 3 is closed after setting the reference value. Become. Here, when a change in the magnetic field around the magnetic detector occurs due to a change in the state of the gaming machine frame 3 (specifically, a change from the open state to the closed state), as shown in FIG. 21-8 (A). Furthermore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (t2), the detected value of the x-axis magnetism detected by the magnetic detector changes greatly, and when the resultant magnetic field change exceeds the threshold value (t3), the magnetic detection is performed. An error signal is output from the instrument.

  As shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), in the general configuration, the magnetic field change around the magnetic detector due to the change in the state of the gaming machine frame 3 is erroneously detected as improper magnetism, which makes the player uncomfortable. And may increase the management burden of the administrator. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), since the reference value is not set appropriately, it is not limited to the timing at which the magnetic field change around the magnetic detector due to the change in the state of the gaming machine frame 3 occurs. There is also a risk that non-magnetism is erroneously detected as illegal magnetism. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the illegal magnetism that is originally desired to be detected cannot be detected.

  On the other hand, in the example of the configuration of the feature 136IW shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (T1), the setting value is changed or confirmed, the error is released, and the game When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened for the restart operation or the like, the magnetic detector CLRT signal is not output from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Therefore, power supply to the magnetic detector is not started, and a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field is not set. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (T2), after a predetermined waiting period (T2 to T3) has elapsed, the main board 11 (game control micro A magnetic detector CLRT signal is output from the computer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Then, power supply to the magnetic detector is started and the selection signal Sa is input. In the magnetic detector, a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field is set. In this case, since the state of the gaming machine frame 3 does not change after setting the reference value, erroneous detection can be suppressed.

As described above, this feature 136IW includes the first invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that an operation such as changing a set value can be performed with the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine opened. On the other hand, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-279247, a change in impedance due to a magnetic field applied to an amorphous wire arranged along three axes orthogonal to each other is detected, and detection based on each change amount is detected. A configuration for detecting whether or not a magnet is present in the vicinity of a gaming machine using a magnetic sensor configured to output a voltage is described. Such a configuration is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. It can be applied to a gaming machine. However, when applied simply, the opening and closing of the front frame in order to perform operations such as changing the setting value (that is, the change in the state of the front frame) affects the detection value (for example, the reference value) of the magnetic sensor. There is a risk of false detection. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, a part that executes step 136IWS029 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) When,
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A reference value (for example, a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204) can be set when the power is turned on, and an illegal magnetic field change is detected based on the reference value. A magnetic detector (for example, a first magnetic detector 136IW100 or a second magnetic detector 136IW101);
Based on the fact that an illegal magnetic field change has been detected by the magnetic detector, a notification means for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first magnetic field in the main-side error process in step S22). When the error signal from the detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is in a state corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection) (for example, high level), it is used to notify that an abnormality has been detected. An abnormality notification process)
If the set value is changed when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set at least until the change of the set value is completed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs setting change processing). If it is being executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output at least until the setting change process is completed (see FIG. 21-7), and the setting board 136IW300 does not output the magnetic detector CTRL signal. The power supply to the magnetic detector is not started, and the reference value is not set until the power supply to the magnetic detector is started (see FIG. 21-2))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and suitably notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
If the set value has been changed when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until a predetermined period has elapsed after the change of the set value is completed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 When the setting change process is being executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output until a predetermined waiting period has elapsed after the setting change process is completed (see FIG. 21-7).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an illegal magnetic field change.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
Power supply control means (for example, setting board 136IW300) for controlling power supply to the magnetic detector is provided,
The power control means does not supply power to the magnetic detector when the set value is changed when the power is turned on (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not perform the setting change process). Is executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 21-7), and the setting board 136IW300 starts supplying power to the magnetic detector until the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output. (Refer to Fig. 21-2))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an illegal magnetic field change.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
A plurality of magnetic detectors (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101),
The power supply control means supplies power to the plurality of magnetic detectors based on one signal (for example, the setting board 136IW300 outputs the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the first magnetic detector 136IW100 when the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output). (2) The power supply to the magnetic detector 136IW101 is started (see FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2).
According to such a configuration, an increase in parts can be suppressed and a processing burden can be reduced.

The feature 136IW includes the following second invention. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that an operation such as changing a set value can be performed with the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine opened. On the other hand, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-279247, a change in impedance due to a magnetic field applied to an amorphous wire arranged along three axes orthogonal to each other is detected, and detection based on each change amount is detected. A configuration for detecting whether or not a magnet is present in the vicinity of a gaming machine using a magnetic sensor configured to output a voltage is described. Such a configuration is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. It can be applied to a gaming machine. However, when applied simply, the opening and closing of the front frame in order to perform operations such as changing the setting value (that is, the change in the state of the front frame) affects the detection value (for example, the reference value) of the magnetic sensor. There is a risk of false detection. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, a part that executes step 136IWS029 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) When,
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set;
A reference value (for example, a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204) can be set when the power is turned on, and an illegal magnetic field change is detected based on the reference value. A magnetic detector (for example, a first magnetic detector 136IW100 or a second magnetic detector 136IW101);
Based on the fact that an illegal magnetic field change has been detected by the magnetic detector, a notification means for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first magnetic field in the main-side error process in step S22). When the error signal from the detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is in a state corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection) (for example, high level), it is used to notify that an abnormality has been detected. An abnormality notification process)
An openable / closable body (for example, a frame 3 for a gaming machine),
The reference value is not set at least until the opening / closing body is closed when the opening / closing body is opened when the power is turned on (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 has a gaming machine frame 3). Is opened, at least until the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 21-7), and the setting board 136IW300 receives the magnetic detector CTRL signal. The power supply to the magnetic detector is not started until it is output, and the reference value is not set until the power supply to the magnetic detector is started (see FIG. 21-2))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and suitably notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
If the opening / closing body is opened when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until a predetermined period elapses after the opening / closing body is closed (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is used for gaming machines). When the frame 3 is opened, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output until a predetermined waiting period elapses after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (see FIG. 21-7).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an illegal magnetic field change.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
Power supply control means (for example, setting board 136IW300) for controlling power supply to the magnetic detector is provided,
The power supply control means does not supply power to the magnetic detector when the open / close body is opened when the power is turned on (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not supply the game machine frame 3). When is open, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 21-7), and the setting board 136IW300 starts supplying power to the magnetic detector until the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output. (Refer to Fig. 21-2))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an illegal magnetic field change.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A plurality of magnetic detectors (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101),
The power supply control means supplies power to the plurality of magnetic detectors based on one signal (for example, the setting board 136IW300 outputs the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the first magnetic detector 136IW100 when the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output). (2) The power supply to the magnetic detector 136IW101 is started (see FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2).
According to such a configuration, an increase in parts can be suppressed and a processing burden can be reduced.

  Note that the structure indicated by the characteristic portion 136IW can be combined with a structure indicated by another characteristic portion such as the characteristic portion 31AK as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine.

(Explanation regarding feature 149IW)
Next, the feature part 149IW will be described. First, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, a game board (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) constituting a game board surface, and a game board 2. And a frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the machine. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 3 has a glass door frame having a glass window that rotates between a door open position that opens the front of the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side and a door closed position that closes the front. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

  The gaming machine frame 3 can be opened by inserting and unlocking a door key owned by a store clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown), and a player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass. The door frame cannot be opened.

  Further, the game board 2 and its peripheral members (for example, a board case including the main board 11 and the like) are configured to be detachable from the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the gaming board 2 and its peripheral members (for example, the board case including the main board 11) are referred to as “board-side members”, and the gaming machine frame 3 and its peripheral members (for example, the power supply board 149IW17 and the payout control board 149IW18). Sometimes referred to as “frame side member”.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 149IW, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member.

  These setting keys 149IW06 are provided on the main board 11 with a setting switching main body provided with an operation section that can be operated by the player, and the setting keys 149IW06 can be operated without opening the board case. It is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back right part of the substrate case.

  Since the board case having the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key. Further, since the setting key 149IW06 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like of the amusement hall, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. In other words, the setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 149IW06 unless a store clerk or the like of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 with the door key. The setting key 149IW06 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation. In addition, in this characteristic part 149IW, although the door key and the setting key illustrated the form which is a separate key, you may share by one key.

  In addition, the clear switch 149IW16 in the feature unit 149IW is used to change a set value such as a winning probability (outrun rate) in a setting change state in addition to a function (see FIG. 3) for executing an initialization process. It also has a function as a setting changeover switch. As a result, the number of members can be reduced as compared with the case where the switch for executing the initialization process and the setting changeover switch for changing the setting value are provided by different members, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Here, the setting value will be briefly described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 149IW is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate and the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in order of 2, 3, the advantage increases stepwise.

  Specifically, when the power is turned on, the set value is changed based on whether the door opening sensor 149IW15 is on (the door is open), the setting key 149IW06 is on, and the clear switch 149IW16 is on. It is controlled to a setting change state in which the setting change process can be executed. In the setting change process, the set value is switched every time the clear switch 149IW16 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 149IW07.

  When the power is turned on, the setting for confirming the set value based on whether the door open sensor 149IW15 is on (the door is open), the setting key 149IW06 is on, and the clear switch 149IW16 is off It is controlled to a setting confirmation state in which confirmation processing can be executed. In the setting confirmation process, the current setting value is displayed on the display monitor 149IW07 without switching the setting value.

  The control to the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, the setting change process, and the setting confirmation process are performed by the game control microcomputer 100.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 149IW includes a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability changing area inside in addition to the special variable winning ball device 7, and the special variable winning ball device is provided during the big hit game. The probability variation is determined based on the passing of the game ball in the probability variation region at, and the probability variation state is controlled after the big hit game is completed.

  FIG. 22-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 149IW.

  As shown in FIG. 22-1, the main board 11 is connected to the magnetic sensor 149IW01, the count switch 23, the general winning opening switch 149IW02, the probability changing area switch 149IW03, the gate switch 21, and the solenoids 81 and 82 via the relay base 149IW05. 149IW04 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-1, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A and the second start port switch 22 </ b> B are connected to the main board 11.

  As shown in FIG. 22-1, the main board 11 includes a first out confirmation switch 149IW10, a second out confirmation switch 149IW11, and a first prize confirmation switch 149IW12 via the relay boards 149IW08 and 149IW09 and the payout control board 149IW18. The second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-1, a touch sensor 149IW14 and a door opening sensor 149IW15 are connected to the main board 11 via a relay base 149IW08 and a payout control board 149IW18.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-1, a clear switch 149IW16 is connected to the main board 11 via a relay board 149IW08 and a power supply board 149IW17.

  As shown in FIG. 22-1, the main board 11 is equipped with a setting key 149IW06 and a display monitor 149IW07 in addition to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The magnetic sensor 149IW01 is a detecting means for detecting an unauthorized operation using a magnet outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and outputs a magnetic sensor signal indicating a detection state of an external magnetic field due to the unauthorized operation to the game control microcomputer 100. Output. When a magnetic sensor signal indicating that an external magnetic field has been detected due to an unauthorized operation is input, the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes a communication unit that can communicate with the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hall management computer. An abnormality notification process is performed to notify an administrator such as a hall staff that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an abnormality.

  The count switch 23 is a detecting means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening, and the game control microcomputer 100 sends a big winning opening winning signal indicating the winning state of the gaming ball to the big winning opening. Output. The game control microcomputer 100 receives a predetermined number (for example, 14) of games with respect to the payout control board 149IW18 when a large winning opening winning signal indicating that a winning of a game ball has been detected at the big winning opening is input. A signal indicating that the ball is paid out as a prize ball is transmitted. The payout control board 149IW18 that has received the signal performs control for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls as prize balls, and also outputs a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100.

  The general winning opening switch 149IW02 is a detecting means for detecting a winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 10, and indicates a general winning indicating the winning state of the gaming ball to the general winning opening 10 in the game control microcomputer 100. The mouth winning signal is output. The game control microcomputer 100 receives a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the payout control board 149IW18 when a general winning opening winning signal indicating that a winning of a game ball is detected in the general winning opening 10 is input. A signal indicating that the game ball is paid out as a prize ball is transmitted. The payout control board 149IW18 that has received the signal performs control for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls as prize balls, and also outputs a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100.

  The probability variation area switch 149IW03 is detection means for detecting a winning of a game ball in the probability variation area, and outputs a probability variation area winning signal indicating a winning state of the game ball to the probability variation area to the game control microcomputer 100. . When a probability variation area winning signal indicating that a winning of a game ball has been detected in the probability variation area is input, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game control microcomputer 100 to be in a probability variation state after the big hit game ends.

  The gate switch 21 is detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 and outputs a gate passage signal indicating the passage state of the game ball to the passage gate 41 to the game control microcomputer 100. . When the gate passing signal indicating that the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the gaming control microcomputer 100 performs control for storing the general-purpose holding memory.

  The solenoid 81 is a drive member for changing the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) between a closed state and an open state. The gaming control microcomputer 100 changes the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) to the open state when allowing the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). The solenoid drive signal for output is output to the solenoid 81.

  The solenoid 82 is a drive member for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 between a closed state and an open state. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a solenoid drive signal for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state to the solenoid 82 when allowing the special variable winning ball device 7 to win the game ball.

  The solenoid 149IW04 is a drive member for changing a special variable winning ball apparatus having a predetermined probability change region therein between a closed state and an open state. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a solenoid drive signal for changing the special variable winning ball device to the open state to the solenoid 149IW04 when allowing the winning of the gaming ball to the probability changing area.

  The first start port switch 22A is a detecting means for detecting a winning of a game ball to the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a game to the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port). A first start opening winning signal indicating the winning state of the ball is output to the game control microcomputer 100. The game control microcomputer 100 stores the first reserved memory when the first start port winning signal indicating that the winning of the game ball to the winning ball device 6A (first start winning port) is detected is input. And a signal indicating that a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are to be paid out as prize balls are transmitted to the payout control board 149IW18. Upon receiving the signal, the payout control board 149IW18 performs control for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as a prize ball, and also outputs a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize ball has been normally paid out for game control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100.

  The second start port switch 22B is a detecting means for detecting a winning of a game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). A first start opening winning signal indicating the winning state of the game ball is output to the gaming control microcomputer 100. The game control microcomputer 100 stores the second reserved memory when the second start port winning signal indicating that the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) is detected is input. And a signal indicating that a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are to be paid out as prize balls are transmitted to the payout control board 149IW18. Upon receiving the signal, the payout control board 149IW18 performs control for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as a prize ball, and also outputs a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize ball has been normally paid out for game control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100.

  The first out confirmation switch 149IW10 is a detecting means for detecting the entry (discharge) of the game ball to the out port, and the first out confirmation signal indicating the state of the game ball entering the out port is a game. The data is output to the control microcomputer 100. The second out confirmation switch 149IW11 is a detecting means for detecting the entry of the game ball into the out mouth, and controls the second out confirmation signal indicating the state of the game ball entering the out mouth. Output to the microcomputer 100. The first out confirmation switch 149IW10 is provided upstream of the second out confirmation switch 149IW11. That is, when the game ball is normally discharged from the out port, first, the discharge of the game ball is detected by the first out confirmation switch 149IW10, and then the discharge of the game ball is detected by the second out confirmation switch 149IW11. It is what is done.

  For example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives a first out confirmation signal indicating that a game ball has entered the out port, the game control microcomputer 100 adds “1” to the count value and outputs the game ball to the out port. When the second out confirmation signal indicating that the incoming ball is detected is received, the count value is decremented by “1”. When the count value exceeds a predetermined threshold, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a communication unit that can communicate with the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hall management computer as an error occurrence. Then, an abnormality notification process for notifying the manager such as the hall staff that there is an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed.

  The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 is a detecting means for detecting that the winning of the game ball to the winning ball device 6A (first start winning port) is normally performed, and the winning ball device 6A (first ball) The first winning confirmation signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to (1 start winning opening) is output to the game control microcomputer 100. The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 is provided on the downstream side of the first start port switch 22A. That is, when a game ball wins normally to the winning ball device 6A (first start winning opening), the winning of the game ball is first detected by the first start opening switch 22A, and then the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12. The winning of the game ball is detected by.

  The second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 is a detecting means for detecting that the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is normally performed, and the variable winning ball device 6B. A second winning confirmation signal indicating the winning state of the game ball at the (second starting winning opening) is output to the gaming control microcomputer 100. The second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 is provided on the downstream side of the second start port switch 22B. That is, when a game ball wins normally in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening), the winning of the game ball is first detected by the second start opening switch 22B, and then the second start opening switch. The winning of the game ball is detected by 22B.

  For example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 matches the input first start opening prize signal and the first winning confirmation signal, or matches the input second start opening prize signal and the second winning confirmation signal. If it cannot be removed, it is assumed that an error has occurred, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is given to managers such as hall staff using the communication unit that can communicate with the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and the hall management computer. An abnormality notification process for notifying that there is an abnormality is executed.

  The number of game balls detected by the first out confirmation switch 149IW10 and the second out confirmation switch 149IW11 (the number of game balls (out balls) entering the out port) and the game detected by the first prize confirmation switch 149IW12 Ball (the number of game balls (first start winning ball) that won the winning ball device 6A (first start winning port)) and the number of game balls detected by the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 (variable winning ball device 6B) The sum total of the number of game balls (second start winning balls) won in the (second start winning opening) is the total number of game balls fired (total number of shot balls). Therefore, based on the total number of shot balls and the number of game balls won at each winning opening, the ratio (the so-called base) of the number of prize balls to the game balls that have been launched, and the ratio of bonuses (variable prize ball device 6B (second start) It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning in the winning award) or the big winning opening and the number of winning balls by winning in other winning ports. The calculation result is displayed on the display monitor 149IW07. If the calculation result is outside the predetermined range, the hall staff or the like can be managed by using the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and a communication unit that can communicate with the hall management computer. It may be possible to notify a person that the calculation result is a value outside a predetermined range.

  The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 are provided for confirming winning in the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port) and the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). However, it may be possible to confirm winning in other winning ports (large winning port, general winning port 10, probability variation area). For example, a game ball flowing down to the winning ball device 6A (first start winning port), a game ball flowing down to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and a grand winning port The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 or the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 is provided with a downward passage of the game ball, a downward passage of the game ball winning the general winning opening 10, and a downward passage of the game ball winning the probability variation area. It may be configured to merge with the formed passage. In that case, the total number of game balls detected by each detection means (the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the general winning port switch 149IW02, the probability variation area switch 149IW03), and the first winning game If there is a difference of a predetermined number or more between the total number of game balls detected by the confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, there is a risk of winning a prize due to an illegal act using a threaded ball or the like. Therefore, using the communication unit communicable with the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hall management computer, an abnormality notifying the manager of the hall staff or the like that there is an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Notification processing may be executed. Here, the “predetermined number” is, for example, the maximum detection difference assumed when a game ball is clogged in a passage between each detection means and the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13. .

  The touch sensor 149IW14 is a detection means for detecting that the player is in contact with the hitting operation handle 30, and a touch signal indicating a contact state of the player with the hitting operation handle 30 is sent to the prize ball control board. It is output to the game control microcomputer 100 via the 149IW18. The award ball control board 149IW18 performs control for permitting the launch of a game ball when a touch signal indicating that the player's contact with the hitting operation handle 30 is detected is input. That is, even if a rotation operation to the hitting operation handle 30 is performed in a state where a touch signal indicating that a player's contact with the hitting operation handle 30 has been detected is not input, the gaming ball is not fired and the hitting operation handle When a touch signal indicating that a player's contact with the player 30 has been detected is input, the game ball is launched when a rotation operation is performed on the hitting operation handle 30.

  The door opening sensor 149IW15 is detection means for detecting the state (opened state or closed state) of the gaming machine frame 3, and is an open / closed state signal indicating the state (opened state or closed state) of the gaming machine frame 3 Is output to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The clear switch 149IW16 is a detection means for executing initialization, and is a setting changeover switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (running rate) in the setting change state, and the operation state A clear switch signal indicating (pressed or not pressed) is output to the game control microcomputer 100.

  In the feature section 149IW, the clear switch 149IW16 is connected to the main board 11 via the power supply board 149IW17. However, the clear switch 149IW16 may be mounted on the power supply board 149IW17 or the relay board 149IW08, or 11 may be mounted.

  The setting key 149IW06 is detection means for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and outputs a setting key signal indicating the operation state (ON or OFF) to the game control microcomputer 100.

  As described above, the gaming control microcomputer 100 has an open / close state signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state and a clear switch signal indicating that the clear switch 149IW16 is pressed when the power is turned on. When the setting key signal indicating that the setting key 149IW06 is ON is input, the setting key 149IW06 is controlled to the setting change state. In addition, when the power is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 100 receives an open / close state signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 3 is open and a setting key signal indicating that the setting key 149IW06 is ON. However, when the clear switch signal indicating that the clear switch 149IW16 is pressed is not inputted, the setting confirmation state is controlled.

  The display monitor 149IW07 is a display device for displaying the current set value. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a display control signal for displaying the current set value to the display monitor 149IW07 in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state.

  The setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11, and includes a magnetic force sensor 149IW01, a count switch 23, a general prize opening switch 149IW02, a probability changing area switch 149IW03, a gate switch 21, a first start opening switch 22A, and a second start opening switch. 22B is provided on the back surface of the game board 2, that is, these detecting means are provided on the board side member.

  On the other hand, the clear switch 149IW16 is provided connected to the power supply board 149IW17, and the touch sensor 149IW14 and the door opening sensor 149IW15 are provided connected to the payout control board 149IW18, and further, the first out confirmation switch 149IW10, The 2-out confirmation switch 149IW11, the first prize confirmation switch 149IW12, and the second prize confirmation switch 149IW13 are provided in the gaming machine frame 3, that is, these detection means are provided in the frame side member.

  Each detection means is provided on the panel side member or the frame side member, but the member provided with each detection means is not limited to the one shown in the characteristic portion 149IW. For example, in the feature portion 149IW, a part or all of the plurality of detection means described as being provided on the board side member may be provided on the frame side member. In part 149IW, you may comprise so that one part or all part may be provided in the board | plate side member among the several detection means demonstrated as being provided in the frame side member.

  FIG. 22-2 is a block diagram illustrating a connection example between each detection unit and the main board 11 in the feature unit 149IW.

  As shown in FIG. 22-2, detection signals from the magnetic sensor 149IW01, the count switch 23, the general winning opening switch 149IW02, and the probability variation area switch 149IW03 are input to the input port 149IW20.

  As shown in FIG. 22-2, the first out confirmation switch 149IW10, the second out confirmation switch 149IW11, the first prize confirmation switch 149IW12, the second prize confirmation switch 149IW13, the touch sensor 149IW14, the door opening sensor 149IW15, the clear switch 149IW16, and A detection signal from the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 149IW21.

  As shown in FIG. 22-2, the detection signal from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the power supply confirmation signal, and the prize ball control signal from the payout control board 149IW18 are input. Input to port 149IW22.

  As shown in FIG. 22-2, the solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81, 82, and 149IW04 is output from the output port 149IW23.

  As shown in FIG. 22-2, the display control signal to the display monitor 149IW07 is output from the input port 149IW24.

  As shown in FIG. 22-2, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11. In the main board 11, the transmission path of the signal from the setting key 149IW06, the first out confirmation switch 149IW10, and the second out confirmation switch 149IW11. The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, the touch sensor 149IW14, the door opening sensor 149IW15, and the transmission path of the detection signal from the clear switch 149IW16 are joined. Thereby, there are few board design changes and wiring routing, and security can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-2, the setting key 149IW06 and the display monitor 149IW07 are mounted on the main board 11 as electronic components, but are not limited thereto. For example, the setting key 149IW06 and the display monitor 149IW07 may be mounted on a specific board different from the main board 11, and the main board 11 and the specific board may be housed in the same board case.

  Hereinafter, the input port 149IW20 may be referred to as “input port 0”, the input port 149IW21 may be referred to as “input port 1”, and the input port 149IW22 may be referred to as “input port 2”.

  FIG. 22C is an explanatory diagram of an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control microcomputer 100. When providing a plurality of input ports for receiving signals from a plurality of detection means, it is conceivable to divide the input ports for each member (frame side member, panel side member) provided with the detection means. Therefore, first, regarding a first example (an example that does not correspond to the block diagram shown in FIG. 22-2) in which the input port is divided for each member (frame side member, panel side member) provided with the detection means, This will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, in the first example, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (A), the detection signal from the detection means provided on the panel side member is input to the input ports 0 and 2 and provided on the frame side member. When connection is made so that the detection signal from the detection means is input to the input port 1, the detection signals of the setting key 149IW06, the count switch 23, and the general prize opening switch 149IW02 are respectively input to the bits 0, 1, and 5 of the input port 0. Entered.

  In addition, bits 0 to 7 of the input port 1 respectively include a first out confirmation switch 149IW10, a second out confirmation switch 149IW11, a magnetic sensor 149IW01, a first prize confirmation switch 149IW12, a second prize confirmation switch 149IW13, and a touch sensor 149IW14. , Detection signals of the door opening sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are input.

  In addition, detection signals of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the gate switch 21 are input to the bits 0, 1, and 3 of the input port 1, respectively. Are respectively supplied with a power confirmation signal and a prize ball control signal from the payout control board 149IW18.

  In this way, the detection signal from the detection means provided on the panel side member is input to the input ports 0 and 2, and the detection signal from the detection means provided to the frame side member is input to the input port 1. In this case, the detection signal of the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 0, while the detection signals of the door opening sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are input to the input port 1. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the detection signal of the setting key 149IW06 from the input port 0 and opens the door when determining whether to control the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. It is necessary to perform processing for reading the detection signals of the sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 from the input port 1, respectively, and the processing load is large.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (B), the input port is divided for each member (frame side member, panel side member) provided with detection means, and the setting key 149IW06 is input for the frame side member. A second example of connection to port 1 (an example corresponding to the block diagram shown in FIG. 22-2) will be described.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (B), detection signals mainly from detection means provided on the board side member are input to the input ports 0 and 2, and detection means provided mainly on the frame side member. The detection signal from the setting key 149IW06 is connected to the input port 1 and the detection signal from the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 1, thereby detecting the setting key 149IW06, the door opening sensor 149IW15, and the clear switch 149IW16. A signal is input to the input port 1. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the detection signals of the setting key 149IW06, the door opening sensor 149IW15, and the clear switch 149IW16 when determining whether or not to control the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. Since processing can be performed collectively, an increase in processing load can be prevented.

  In the feature part 149IW, “mainly” is a concept indicating that it occupies a majority. For example, if there is a group including three elements and two or more of the three elements have special properties, the elements included in the group mainly have special properties. It can be said that there is. Specifically, when “the detection signal from the detection means provided mainly on the panel side member is input to the specific input port”, among the plurality of detection signals input to the specific input port, It shows that the majority of the detection signals are detection signals from the detection means provided on the panel side member.

  The signal from the detection means provided on the panel side member is mainly input to the input port 0, and the signal from the detection means provided to the frame side member is mainly input to the input port 1. Yes. Thereby, an increase in processing load can be suppressed. Specifically, when reading signals input from a plurality of detection means provided on the board side member / frame side member, it is possible to read in a batch from one input port, thereby suppressing an increase in processing load. be able to. In addition, by providing an input port to which detection signals of detection means provided mainly on the panel side member are input and an input port to which detection signals of detection means provided mainly on the frame side member are input, respectively. Since a storage area corresponding to each input port may be provided, it is effective for compression (saving) of storage capacity.

  Further, as described above, signals from the detection means provided on the panel side member are mainly input to the input ports 0 and 2, and signals from the detection means provided on the frame side member are mainly input to the input port 1. However, the setting key 149IW06 is configured to be input to the input port 1 of the panel side member. Thereby, from the gaming machine (the gaming machine connected as shown in FIG. 22-3 (A)) configured to connect each detecting means to the input port corresponding to the position where each detecting means is provided. It is possible to realize that signals from the setting key 149IW06, the door opening switch 149IW15, and the clear switch 149IW16 are input to one input port with a small change.

  Specifically, the door opening switch 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are changed to the input port 0 when the setting key 149IW06 is reconnected to the input port 1 from the gaming machine connected as shown in FIG. It is possible to realize that signals from the setting key 149IW06, the door opening switch 149IW15, and the clear switch 149IW16 are input to one input port with fewer changes than reconnecting.

  Note that the clear switch 149IW16 may be provided on the board-side member. In that case, “a game configured such that each detection means is connected to an input port corresponding to the position where each detection means is provided. The machine is assumed to be a gaming machine connected so that a signal from the clear switch 149IW16 and a signal from the setting key 149IW06 are input to the input port 0 and a signal from the door opening switch 149IW15 is input to the input port 1. Therefore, when the door opening switch 149IW15 is reconnected to the input port 1, the setting key 149IW06, the door opening switch 149IW15, and the switch 149IW06 and the setting key 149IW06 are reconfigured with fewer changes than reconnecting the input port 0. The signal from the clear switch 149IW16 To be input can be realized at the input port.

  Note that the clear switch for executing the initialization process and the setting changeover switch for changing the setting value may be provided by different members. In this case, the function of each switch is clearly distinguished. Therefore, operability can be improved. In this case, the setting changeover switch is provided on the main board 11, and it is assumed that a signal from the clear dedicated switch provided on the frame side member is input to the input port 1, but the signal from the setting changeover switch May be input to any input port.

  For example, if signals from the door opening sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, the clear switch and the setting switch are input to one input port, the door opening sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, the clear switch and the setting switch Since signals from the switch can be read in a batch, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  Further, for example, signals from the door opening sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, and the clear dedicated switch are read to determine whether or not to control the setting change state, and the signal from the setting changeover switch is in the setting change state. Since it is read to determine whether or not to switch the setting value, the timing for reading the signal from the door opening sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06 and the clear switch is different from the timing for reading the signal from the setting switch. Therefore, even if the signal from the setting changeover switch is input to an input port different from the input port to which signals from the door opening sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, and the clear dedicated switch are input, the processing load does not increase. It is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (B), the signal input to the input port 0 is mainly “0” (the input becomes low level), and is turned off while being “1”. On the other hand, the signal input to the input port 1 is mainly “1” and turned off when the input is “0”. This is a negative logic that is turned on. As a result, even when an illegal operation that causes each detection means to be turned on illegally due to an unauthorized radio wave transmitted by a so-called radio goto occurs, the signal input to the input port 0 and the signal input to the input port 1 Both of them can be prevented from being turned on at the same time.

  Further, it has board-side wiring connected to the main board 11 from the detection means provided on the game board-side member, and frame-side wiring connected to the main board 11 from the detection means provided on the frame-side member. However, it is conceivable that the frame side wiring is longer than the panel side wiring and is susceptible to noise. Therefore, as described above, the detection signal transmitted by the frame side wiring (mainly the detection signal input to the input port 1) is set to negative logic, so that it is ON even if noise occurs in the OFF state. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection as a state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22-3 (B), the logic and state are not described for the prize ball control signal (bit 7 of the input port 2), but this is the prize ball output from the payout control board 149IW18. This is because the control signal has a different signal format from the detection signals from other detection means. The prize ball control signal may be a signal composed of a plurality of bits. Similarly to other detection signals, “0” indicates that the payout of the prize ball has been completed, and “1”. A signal indicating completion of payout of the prize ball may be used.

  Moreover, although the power supply confirmation signal is not shown in FIG. 22-1, this is because the detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal is mounted on the main board 11. As described above, since the detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal is mounted on the main board 11, the state of the power supply confirmation signal can be monitored in accordance with the control state in the main board 11. When the voltage drops, processing such as backup on the main board 11 can be performed more safely.

  Further, a detection circuit for detecting a power supply confirmation signal may be mounted on the power supply board 149IW17. For example, when the control means in the power supply board 149IW17 detects a drop in the power supply voltage based on the power supply confirmation signal. A signal indicating that may be transmitted to other boards (main board 11, payout control board 149IW18, effect control board 12, etc.). In that case, since the processing at the time of power interruption can be performed with a smaller number of components than mounting a detection circuit for detecting a power supply confirmation signal on each substrate, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Each board that has received a signal indicating a drop in power supply voltage from the power supply board 149IW17 may perform processing for backing up various data.

  Although the feature unit 149IW has been described using a so-called pachinko machine, the present invention is not limited to this, and other game machines such as a slot machine (pachislot) may be used. A slot machine generally includes a variable display unit having a plurality of (usually three) reels on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel is started by a player. Rotation is started by operating the lever, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the player rotates within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. Stop. A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  For example, the above-described setting key, a clear switch, and a door opening sensor that detects an open / closed state of an openable / closable casing (including peripheral members such as the casing and a power supply board), and a detection signal from the setting key And the slot machine by which the detection signal from a clear switch and the detection signal from a door open sensor are input into one input port among the several input ports with which a control means is provided may be sufficient.

  In addition, for example, a variable display unit (including peripheral members such as a reel, a liquid crystal display device, and a main substrate) that can be attached to and detached from the housing unit is provided, and a detection signal of a detection unit provided in the housing unit is mainly input. The slot machine may include a housing unit side input port and a variable display unit side input port to which a detection signal of a detection unit provided in the variable display unit is mainly input.

  In addition, for example, the setting key detection signal provided in the variable display unit may be a slot machine that is input to the housing side input port, or the setting key detection signal transmission path provided on the main board. And a slot machine in which the transmission path of the detection signal of the detection means provided in the fluctuation display unit merges in the main board.

As described above, the feature 149IW includes the invention described below. In other words, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and can be controlled in an advantageous state based on the set value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that an operation such as changing a set value can be performed with the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine opened. On the other hand, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-77349 describes a configuration including a control unit (for example, a main board) provided with a plurality of input ports. It is conceivable to apply to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 200902. However, when simply applied, a member that outputs a predetermined signal is connected to an input port corresponding to a position where the member is provided (for example, the first input port if the member is provided in the game frame). Connection to the second input port if a member is provided on the game board), but there is a risk that the processing burden will increase when reading signals input to a plurality of input ports is there. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
An openable / closable opening / closing body (for example, a frame side member (including a gaming machine frame 3, a power supply board 149IW17, a payout control board 149IW18)),
Open / close detecting means for detecting the state of the open / close body (for example, a door opening sensor 149IW15);
First operation detecting means (for example, clear switch 149IW16) capable of detecting the first operation;
Second operation detecting means (for example, setting key 149IW06) capable of detecting the second operation;
Control means (for example, main board 11) including a plurality of input ports (for example, input port 149IW20 to input port 149IW22 (input port 0 to input port 2)) capable of inputting signals;
A detection signal of the opening / closing detection means (for example, a signal from the door opening sensor 149IW15), a detection signal of the first operation detection means (for example, a signal from the clear switch 149IW16), and a detection signal of the second operation detection means (For example, a signal from the setting key 149IW06) is input to a specific input port (for example, the input port 149IW21 (input port 1)) among the plurality of input ports,
The control means includes
When the detection signal of the open / close detection means, the detection signal of the first operation detection means, and the detection signal of the second operation detection means are in a specific input state, a set value (for example, a set value “ 1 ”to setting value“ 3 ”) setting means that can be set to any one of the setting values (for example, in the gaming control microcomputer 100, when the power is turned on, the door opening sensor 149IW15 is turned on (the door is open) And the setting key 149IW06 is on and the clear switch 149IW16 is on, and the setting value is changed),
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value that has been set. According to this feature, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the invention,
The gaming machine further includes a detachable body (for example, a board-side member (including a board case including the game board 2, the main board 11, etc.)) that is detachable from the opening / closing body
Detachable body side detection means (for example, magnetic sensor 149IW01, count switch 23, general prize opening switch 149IW02, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, provided on the attachable body and detecting a first event, and Gate switch 21);
Opening / closing body-side detection means (for example, a first out confirmation switch 149IW10, a second out confirmation switch 149IW11, a first prize confirmation switch 149IW12, a second prize confirmation switch 149IW13, a touch provided on the opening / closing body to detect a second event Sensor 149IW14, door opening sensor 149IW15, and clear switch 149IW16),
The control means includes a first input port (for example, input ports 149IW20 and 149IW22 (input ports 0 and 2)) to which a detection signal of the detachable body side detection means is mainly input, and a detection signal of the open / close body side detection means. It is described that a plurality of input ports (for example, input port 149IW21 (input port 1)) including a second input port that is input to the input port may be provided. An increase in the burden can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the invention,
The second operation detecting means is provided on the detachable body (for example, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11 which can be attached and detached together with the game board 2),
The detection signal of the second operation detecting means is input to the second input port (for example, the signal from the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 149IW21 (input port 1)).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the invention,
The control means includes a control board (for example, main board 11),
The second operation detecting means is provided on the control board (for example, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11),
In the control board, the detection signal transmission path of the second operation detection means and the detection signal transmission path of the switching body side detection means merge (for example, in the main board 11, the transmission path of the signal from the setting key 149IW06) , The first out confirmation switch 149IW10, the second out confirmation switch 149IW11, the first prize confirmation switch 149IW12, the second prize confirmation switch 149IW13, the touch sensor 149IW14, the door opening sensor 149IW15, and the transmission path of the detection signal from the clear switch 149IW16 Meet)
According to such a configuration, there is little change in the design of the board and the routing of the wiring, and the security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the invention,
The control means
Initialization means for performing initialization processing based on the detection signal of the first operation detection means (for example, in the case of Y in step S3 in the game control microcomputer 100 (output from the clear switch 149IW16) The part that executes step S8) when the signal is on)
In the setting change state, setting value updating means for performing processing for updating the setting value based on the detection signal of the first operation means being input (for example, a clear switch in the setting change processing in the game control microcomputer 100) 149IW16 may be included every time the set value is switched), and according to such a configuration, the number of members of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the invention,
A third operation detecting means (for example, a setting changeover switch) capable of detecting the third operation;
The control means
Initialization means for performing initialization processing based on the detection signal of the first operation detection means (for example, in the case of Y in step S3 in the game control microcomputer 100 (output from the clear switch 149IW16) The part that executes step S8) when the signal is on)
In the setting change state, setting value updating means for performing processing for updating the setting value based on the input of the detection signal of the third operating means (for example, setting switching by setting change processing in the gaming control microcomputer 100) A portion that switches the set value each time the switch is operated). According to such a configuration, operability can be improved.

  Note that the configuration indicated by the feature portion 149IW can be combined with the configurations indicated by other feature portions such as the feature portion 31AK, the feature portion 121IW, and the feature portion 136IW as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hit ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM for game control
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Title informing means capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggestion effect.